Chassis Cab
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 Chassis Cab
SIXTH Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
16DD43-126-AF
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . ..............................119
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................225
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................393
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................529
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................555
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................625
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................633
10
INDEX .....................................................................645
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
If applicable, refer to the Diesel Supplement for diesel
related information.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
RAM is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to
body modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer
to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufac-
turer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment in-
stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should
also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for
assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains di-
mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It
is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical
support. For service issues, contact your authorized
dealer.
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Infor-
mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
8 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12
▫ Ignition Node Module (IGNM) ............12
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition — If Equipped . . .13
▫ KeyFob.............................14
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition ..........16
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................18
▫ General Information ....................18
䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................19
▫ Replacement RKE Key Fobs ..............20
▫ Customer RKE Key Fob Programming .......21
▫ General Information ....................21
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ..............21
▫ Rearming Of The System .................21
▫ To Arm The System .....................22
▫ To Disarm The System ...................23
▫ Security System Manual Override ...........24
䡵 ILLUMINATED APPROACH ...............24
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........25
▫ Remote Unlock The Doors ...............26
▫ To Lock The Doors .....................27
2
▫ Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock .........27
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................28
▫ Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs ......28
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement .............29
▫ General Information ....................32
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .32
▫ How To Use Remote Start ................33
▫ Remote Start Abort Message ..............33
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode...............34
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ..............................34
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ..............................35
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . .35
▫ General Information ....................35
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................36
▫ Manual Door Locks .....................36
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped ..........38
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock ...............39
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY ....41
▫ General Information ....................45
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................45
▫ Power Windows — If Equipped ...........45
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................49
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........49
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............49
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................51
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........67
▫ Child Restraints .......................81
▫ Transporting Pets .....................112
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .112
▫ Diesel Engine ........................113
䡵 SAFETY TIPS .........................114
▫ Transporting Passengers .................114
▫ Exhaust Gas .........................114
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................115
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle .........................117
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or
keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system
consists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chip
in it, or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key
Fob and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The keyless
ignition system consists of a RKE Key Fob and a Keyless
Push Button Ignition.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automati-
cally returns to the ON/RUN position.
Ignition Module
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Push Button Ignition — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) Key Fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the RKE Key Fob may have a low or
dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be
used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side
(side opposite of the emergency key) of the Key Fob
against the ENGINE START/STOP button, with your
foot applied on the brake pedal, and push to operate the
ignition switch.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
Key Fob — If Equipped
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi-
tion. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key
Fob and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the
Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key Fob go
dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to
your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be
triggered. Insert the Key Fob into the ignition and place
the ignition in the ON/RUN mode to disarm the security
system.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob (IGNM)
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Push Button Ignition Key Fob — If Equipped
This Keyless Push Button Ignition Key Fob allows the
driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a
button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment. The Keyless Push Button
Ignition has four operating positions, three of which are
labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth posi-
tion is START, during start RUN will illuminate. It also
contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob and an
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key Fob go
dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the backside of the Key Fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE:
When using the emergency key to gain access to
your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be
triggered. Insert the Key Fob into the ignition and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode to disarm the security
system.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob Keyless Enter-N-Go
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the door lock cylinder with either side up.
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the gear selector in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission). Turn the Key Fob to the OFF
position and then remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
•
The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
CAUTION!
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
RKE Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the RKE Key Fob while
in this condition, damage could occur to the RKE
Key Fob or ignition module. Only remove the
emergency key for locking and unlocking the
doors.
• Leave the RKE Key Fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmis-
sion into REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn
the vehicle OFF, remove the RKE Key Fob from the
ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the RKE
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the RKE Key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
a chime will sound to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
• ⬙Keyed⬙ Ignition systems will chime in OFF or ACC
when the driver door is open.
• “Keyless⬙ Ignition systems will chime in ACC or RUN
when the driver door is open.
• If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID), the EVIC or
DID will display “Key In Ignition.”
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a RKE Key Fob, an Ignition Node
Module, Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver
to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system
will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid RKE Key
Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system
will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid RKE
Key Fob is used to start the engine.
NOTE: A RKE Key Fob that has not been programmed is
also considered an invalid key.
During normal operation, after placing the keyless igni-
tion in the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light
will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid RKE Key Fob to try to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the RKE Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement RKE Key Fobs
NOTE: Only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a RKE Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle,
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the RKE Key Fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of RKE Key Fobs may be performed
at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of pro-
gramming a blank RKE Key Fob to the vehicle electron-
ics. A blank RKE Key Fob is one that has never been
programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System ser-
viced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer RKE Key Fob Programming
Programming RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Ve-
hicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for
door locks are disabled. The system provides both au-
dible and visible signals for the first three minutes the
horn will sound and the headlights will turn on, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security
Light will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes
only, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or
turn signals, and Vehicle Security Light will flash.
Rearming Of The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15
additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security
Light flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If the
condition which initiated the alarm is still present, the
system will ignore that condition and monitor the re-
maining doors and ignition.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is
⬙OFF.⬙
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is
⬙OFF⬙ and the key is physically removed from the
ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK
button on the interior power door
lock switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
• Push the LOCK
button on the exterior Passive
Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available
in the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-
N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the LOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
power door locks, or use the RKE Key Fob to lock the
doors. After all the doors are locked and closed, the
Vehicle Security Light, in the instrument panel cluster,
will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the
alarm is being set. After the alarm is set, the Vehicle
Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that
the system is armed.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
1. Push the UNLOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob.
2. Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid RKE Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive
entry door handle (if equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
3. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, push the Keyless Ignition
button (re-
quires at least one valid RKE Key Fob in the
vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn
the key to the ON position.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED APPROACH
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the RKE
Key Fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (rotate horizontal thumb wheel on
the bottom of the switch to the far right detent position).
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position (rotate
horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to
the far left detent position).
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated
approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be
turned off by using the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) con-
trols (if NOT equipped with a touchscreen radio) or the
Uconnect radio (if equipped with a touchscreen radio).
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),”
“Driver Information Display (DID),” or “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock all doors,
tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped) as well as activate
the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft
(20 m) using a hand-held radio Key Fob with integrated
key. The RKE Key Fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system. Push and release the
LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob to lock all doors, the
tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). The turn signal
lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge
the signal.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE Key Fob into the
ignition switch disables the system from responding to
any button pushes from that RKE Key Fob. Driving at
speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE Key Fob buttons for all RKE
Key Fobs.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob (IGNM)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Remote Unlock The Doors
Push and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE
Key Fob once to unlock the driver’s door. Push the
unlock
button twice within five seconds to unlock
all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped).
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
turn on.
NOTE: The EVIC/DID or Uconnect Settings are setup for
driver door first, otherwise this will unlock all doors.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/ Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
RKE Key Fob Keyless Enter-N-Go
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob
while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
sound. Push the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
Vehicle Security Alarm System.
Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE Key Fob.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK
button on the RKE Key
Fob to lock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if
equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE Key Fob. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Pushing the LOCK
button on the RKE Key
Fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with
the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause
the alarm to sound. Push the UNLOCK
button to
deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, push and
hold the
button on the RKE Key Fob for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the turn signal lights
will flash.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the
button a second
time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h)
or greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE Key Fob to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs
If you do not have a programmed RKE Key Fob, contact
your authorized dealer for details.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE Key Fob sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2. Separating RKE Key Fob halves requires screw re-
moval – if equipped, and gently prying the two halves
of the RKE Key Fob apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Remove Screw From Key Fob Case
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
Separating Key Fob Case Separating Key Fob Case
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE Key Fob case, snap the two
halves together, reposition and secure the screw as
shown in step #2 for removal.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the RKE Key Fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system has
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE Key
Fob may reduce this range.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
• Fuel meets minimum requirement
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
• Keep RKE Key Fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious injury or
death.
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the EVIC/DID if
the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start
prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The EVIC/DID message stays active until the ignition is
turned to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the
RKE Key Fob twice within five seconds. The parking
lights will flash, vehicle doors will lock, and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the vehicle has
started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.
NOTE:
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE Key Fob. However, the
ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START
button one
time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-
minute cycle.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering
wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Cus-
tomer Programmable Features” in “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation on Remote Start Comfort System operation.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock
knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up.
Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock knob.
Doors locked before closing will remain locked when
closed.
Door Lock Knob
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on
your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmis-
sion into REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn
the vehicle OFF, remove the RKE Key Fob from the
ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the RKE
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you push the power door LOCK switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your Key Fob in the vehicle. Remov-
ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. The auto door lock feature is enabled/
disabled in the Uconnect Settings.
Automatic Doors Unlock — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
either front door is opened. This will occur only after the
vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the
vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all
doors closed).
Power Door Lock Switch Location
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Doors Unlock Programming — If
Equipped
The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accordance
with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle
have the Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to
engage and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When
the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if the
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE:
• After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll down
the window and open the door with the outside door
handle.
Child Lock Control
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. Refer to “Keyless Enter-
N-Go” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the RKE Key
Fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The vehicles security alarm can be armed/disarmed
by pushing the passive entry key fob lock/unlock
buttons (if equipped).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle
to unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5
m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passen-
ger door handle to unlock all doors automatically. The
interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is
unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Key Fob In Vehicle:
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
Key Fobs. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key
Fobs is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid
Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs are detected outside the
vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks
all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the
third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry
RKE Key Fob can be locked in the vehicle).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
Key Fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
Key Fob lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
The control on the left front door panel has UP-DOWN
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
the front passenger door for passenger window control
and on the rear doors of the Crew Cab models. The
windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front
door is opened.
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
particularly unattended children, can become en-
trapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switch have
an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the
first detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, op-
erate the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, push to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
(4-Door Models Driver And Front Passenger Door
Only) — If Equipped
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road
conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unex-
pectedly during auto closure. If this happens, pull the
switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the
window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window LOCKOUT Switch (4–Door Models Only)
The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver’s door
allows you to disable the window control on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors, push the window LOCK button
into the latched or down position. To enable the window
controls, push the window LOCK button again and
return the switch to the released or up position.
Window Lockout Switch
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙ in this
section of “Occupant Restraints”) should be secured in
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not
use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition is placed in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition is first placed
in the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition is first placed in the START or ON/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Crew Cab front center
seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6.
To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
(Regular Cab Only)
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only) features
a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which
allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when
Adjustable Anchorage
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the seat is folded. The latch plate and regular latch plate
can then be stored out of the way in the seat for added
convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position on the seat.
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
Inserting Latch Plate
In Use Position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-
tor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-
buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into
the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt
will automatically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-
latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed
position.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating Instructions
— If Equipped
The center seating position for the Crew Cab front seat
has a lap belt only. To buckle the lap belt, slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ To lengthen
the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull.
Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear
the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back and upright in
the seat, then adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfort-
able.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner — If Equipped
The front seat belt system may be equipped with preten-
sioning devices that are designed to remove slack from
the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature — If Equipped
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) —
If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
Regular Cab
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
(Continued)
Crew Cab
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags — If Equipped
• Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
• Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Driver/Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Side Air Bags — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with two types of side air
bags:
1.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) (If
Equipped): Located in the outboard side of the front
seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SABs; the performance could be
adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed
into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) (If Equipped): Located above the side win-
dows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) (if equipped
with Side Air Bags) are designed to activate in certain
side impacts and certain rollover events. The Occupant
Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side
impact or rollover event (if equipped with rollover
sensing) is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator
of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
(Continued)
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts (If Equipped Side Air Bags)
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events (If Equipped Side Air Bags)
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition must be changed
from the START or ON/RUN position to the OFF posi-
tion. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is placed in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING! (Continued)
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1-866-732-8243.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-
index-53.htm
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward in
the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the height
or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in
the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Regular Cab
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol – 2 anchorages
per seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Crew Cab Split Bench
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol - 2 anchorages
per seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Crew Cab Full Bench
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seat-
ing position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No Full bench rear seat only: Use the
seat belt and tether anchor to in-
stall a child seat in the center seat-
ing position.
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be at-
tached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes The head restraints can be removed
in each seating position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating Tether Anchorages
Regular Cab models have tether strap anchor-
ages behind the front center and right seats.
Crew Cab models have tether strap anchorages
located behind each of the rear seats.
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Crew Cab Full Bench
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center posi-
tion using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to ⴖInstalling
Child Restraints Using the LATCH Lower Anchor-
agesⴖ in the section ⴖInstalling Child Restraintsⴖ for
typical installation instructions.
Center Seat LATCH — Crew Cab Split Bench
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to ⴖInstalling
Child Restraints Using the LATCH Lower Anchor-
agesⴖ in the section ⴖInstalling Child Restraintsⴖ for
typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
ditional information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
• Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Crew Cab
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
• Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a for-
ward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes The head restraints can be removed
in each seating position.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon-
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(Continued)
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
Regular Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether anchorages are
located behind the center and right passenger seats.
There is a plastic cover over each anchorage. To attach the
tether strap of the child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back,
under the head restraint and to the tether anchor
directly behind the seat.
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap to Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether
strap should go between the head restraint posts
underneath the head restraint. You may need to adjust
the head restraint to the upward position to pass the
tether strap underneath the head restraint and be-
tween its posts.
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
the square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten the
tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing
child restraint.
Crew Cab Trucks:
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether strap
loops located between the rear glass and the back of the
rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located behind each
seating position. Follow the steps below to attach the
tether strap of the child restraint.
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Right or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear
seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind
the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the
center seat.
Head Restraint In Raised Position
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In Raised
Position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the center tether strap
loop.
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left
and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks of
both child seats should be connected to the center tether
strap loop. This is the correct way to tether two outboard
child seats.
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear
seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind
the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind either
the right or left outboard seat.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised
Position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard
tether strap loop.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (see
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat.
Route the tether straps following the directions for
right and left seating positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop, but
do not tighten the straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route the
tether strap following the directions for the center
seating position, above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions, tightening the right and
left tether straps before the center tether strap.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
(Continued)
Left Outboard And Center Seating Position Shown
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
WARNING! (Continued)
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle.”
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
Diesel Engine
The Cummins turbocharged diesel engine does not re-
quire a break-in period due to its construction. Normal
operation is allowed, providing the following recommen-
dations are followed:
• Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
• Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged
periods.
• Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent
engine lugging.
• Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature indica-
tors.
• Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
• Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carry-
ing or towing significant weight.
NOTE: Light duty operation such as light trailer towing
or no load operation will extend the time before the
engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy and
power may be seen at this time.
For additional vehicle break-in requirements, refer to
“Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” of the
Owner’s Manual.
Because of the construction of the Cummins turbo-
charged diesel engine, engine run-in is enhanced by
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
loaded operating conditions which allow the engine
parts to achieve final finish and fit during the first 6,000
miles (10 000 km).
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
(Continued)
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate
with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until
the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Oc-
cupant Restraints” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See your autho-
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover-
ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
(Continued)
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ............................124
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .124
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .124
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped ...........132
▫ Outside Mirrors ......................132
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ...........133
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped ............134
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........136
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . .136
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped ...........................136
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ......137
䡵 SEATS ..............................138
▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped ........139
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped ......141
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped ............142
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped .............142
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped ............145
▫ Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped .......146
3
▫ 40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . .147
▫ Head Restraints ......................148
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .152
▫ Programming The Memory Feature .........152
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory ...................153
▫ Memory Position Recall .................154
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat ...................155
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........156
䡵 LIGHTS .............................158
▫ Headlights ..........................159
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......160
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ..............160
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped .........................161
▫ Headlight Delay ......................161
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .........................162
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights...........164
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............164
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................165
▫ Battery Saver.........................165
▫ Interior Lights .......................165
▫ Cargo Light .........................168
▫ Multifunction Lever ...................169
▫ Turn Signals .........................169
▫ Lane Change Assist ...................170
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................170
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ................170
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......170
▫ Windshield Wipers ....................170
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation .............171
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............171
▫ Windshield Washers ...................171
▫ Mist Feature .........................172
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........173
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN ...............174
䡵 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED .........................175
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED .177
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...........178
▫ To Activate ..........................179
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................180
▫ To Deactivate ........................180
▫ To Resume Speed .....................180
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............180
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............182
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED .........................183
▫ ParkSense Sensors .....................183
▫ ParkSense Warning Display ..............184
▫ ParkSense Display .....................184
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .........188
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System .............................189
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System ...........190
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions........190
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED .........................192
▫ ParkSense Sensors .....................193
▫ ParkSense Warning Display ..............193
▫ ParkSense Display .....................194
▫ Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
ParkSense ...........................196
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .197
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System ...........198
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions........198
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED .........................201
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED .....204
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights ...............204
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........206
䡵 AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED .....211
䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER —
IF EQUIPPED .........................211
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED ........212
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................213
▫ Front Seat Cupholders (40–20–40 Seats) ......213
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders —
Floor Storage Bin......................213
▫ Rear Cupholders — If Equipped ...........214
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 STORAGE ............................215
▫ Glove Compartment ...................215
▫ Door Storage .........................217
▫ Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped . .218
▫ Seatback Storage ......................221
▫ Storage (Regular Cab) ..................221
▫ Storage and Seats (Crew Cab) .............222
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab
Models) ............................222
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............223
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................223
▫ Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . .224
▫ Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped .224
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis-
abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off through the touchscreen.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
features.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9-1-1 Call
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off
the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to re-
main connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal recep-
tion is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
(Continued)
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-
TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle de-
vice requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
pant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from plac-
ing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear a video
display illuminates to display the image generated by the
rear view camera. The auto dimming feature is also
disabled to improve rear view viewing.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated
approach lights under the outside mirrors they can be
turned off through the instrument cluster or the Uconnect
radio. For further information refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis-
play (DID)” and “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel”.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manu-
ally folded both forward and rearward to prevent dam-
age.
Folding Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a
car wash or a narrow location.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls Location
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch.
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right)
button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Power Mirror Controls
1 — Mirror Select Buttons
2 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch
Power Mirror Movement
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on auto-
matically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addi-
tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the
sun.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired
position.
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or out-
board, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped in or
out).
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
Trailer Towing Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to
entering an automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror
and can be adjusted separately.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Blindspot Mirror
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power
driver’s seat. The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion. There are two
power seat switches that are used to control the move-
ment of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas-
senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seat backs.
Lumbar Control Switch
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting On.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting On.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min-
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap-
proximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Uconnect sys-
tem. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
seats are located on the rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently. You can
choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber indica-
tor lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use.
Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for OFF.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Push the switch a second time to select LO-
level heating. Push the switch a third time to
shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after ap-
proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the
air from the passenger compartment and pull air through
fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver
and front passenger cooler in higher ambient tempera-
tures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Uconnect sys-
tem. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or backward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Adjuster
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the
handle, lean back on the seatback and when you reach
the desired position, release the handle.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard
seat portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat.
On some models the back of the center portion (20%)
easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage
compartment.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should
never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button located on the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go
then push the adjustment button and the release button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes then adjust it to the appropriate
height.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Adjustment Buttons
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Rear Head Restraints
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and remov-
able head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull
upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located on the base of the
head restraint and push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button
and the release button while pulling upward on the
whole assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the
appropriate height.
NOTE: To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat
bottom must be folded up.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and Quad
Cab) has only one adjustment position that is used to
aid in the routing of a tether. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Release/Adjustment Buttons
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped) and a set of desired radio station
presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob can
also be programmed to recall the same positions when
the UNLOCK button is pushed.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE Key Fobs,
one RKE Key Fob can be linked to memory position 1 and
the other Key Fob can be linked to memory position 2.
The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard
side of the drivers seat cushion.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
Memory Seat Buttons
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals and radio
station presets).
3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Dis-
play (DID) will display which memory position has
been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your RKE Key Fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
Your RKE Key Fobs can be programmed to recall one of
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.
NOTE: Before programming your RKE Key Fobs to
memory the feature has to be selected.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, you
must select the “Memory To Fob” feature through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, you
must select the “Key Fob Linked To Memory” feature
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To program your RKE Key Fobs, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the Off position.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ for instructions
on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then push
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC/DID.
4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key
Fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE Key Fobs can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi-
tions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID).
• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall
memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the
vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will
display in the EVIC/DID.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory switch, push MEMORY button number 1 on
the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
RKE Key Fob, push the UNLOCK button on the RKE
Key Fob linked to memory position 1.
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
memory switch, push MEMORY button number 2 on
the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
RKE Key Fob, push the UNLOCK button on the RKE
Key Fob linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is
cancelled, the driver’s seat, and the power pedals (if
equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position
is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously
set position when you place the ignition into the ACC
or RUN position.
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move to a
position 0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if
the driver seat position is between 0.9 inches and 2.7
inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position
when you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN
position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering
wheel at the base of the instrument panel.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push the safety latch lever to the left to release it,
before raising the hood.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
(Continued)
Hood Release Safety Latch Location (1500 Series Shown)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
WARNING! (Continued)
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
LIGHTS
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The head-
light switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less suscep-
tible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens
cleaning procedures must be followed.
Headlight Switch Location
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated
approach lights under the outside mirrors they can be
turned off through the instrument cluster or the Uconnect
radio. For further information refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis-
play (DID)” and “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel”.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the headlight position.
When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instru-
ment panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the
headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off)
position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Automatic Headlight Position
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant ⬙Lights ON⬙
condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights
illuminate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the
parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) will turn OFF. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the
DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle may turn off for
the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn
signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated
when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight
switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off.
Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the
headlight switch on then off, or by turning the ignition
ON.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen the
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen the
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv-
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high-
beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
ignition off.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
To Activate
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the
Automatic High Beams are enabled through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the
Automatic High Beams are enabled through the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Infor-
mation Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
Fog Light Switch
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far
right detent position. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and the UNLOCK button is
pushed on the RKE Key Fob the courtesy and dome
lights will turn on. When a door is open and the interior
lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way left,
to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior lights to go
out. This is also known as the ⬙Party⬙ mode because it
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of
time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel as well as the
ambient lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer
control right (brighter) or left (dimmer). When the head-
lights are on you can supplement the brightness of the
odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by
rotating the control to the right until you hear a click. This
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
headlights are required during the day.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
the dimming of the touchscreen is programmable
through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further details.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
UNLOCK button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry
Dimmer Control
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
(RKE) Key Fob, if equipped. These lights are also oper-
ated individually as reading lights by pushing on the
corresponding lens.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, they will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Ambient Light
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil-
ity of the floor console area.
Cargo Light
The cargo light is turned on by pushing on the cargo light
button.
The cargo light will also turn on for approximately 30
seconds when a RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button is
pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
Ambient Light
Cargo Light Button
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Turn Signal Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel will
turn the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the handle to select
the desired wiper speed.
High/Low Beam Switch
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the
wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer
knob is released from this position.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range,
the wiper will operate for several seconds after the
washer knob is released. It will then resume the intermit-
tent interval previously selected. If the washer knob is
pushed while in the off position, the wiper will turn on
and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob
is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one
time and automatically shut off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings
to activate this feature.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi-
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 and 5 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in
place.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
from the driver to provide improved position with the
steering wheel.
Tilt Steering Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of
the steering column.
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion System (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when
the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled
— Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal
Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
•
or vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can
use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob or the
memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return
the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed positions. Re-
fer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 30 to 80 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on
the center of the instrument panel below the climate
controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the heated
steering wheel control button is located within the cli-
mate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to
turn the heating element On.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
time to turn the heating element Off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Uconnect sys-
tem. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Switches
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET -
2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System
Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this
system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s oper-
ating speed, a warning will appear within the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
For the 3500, 4500 and 5500 Chassis Cab vehicles, the rear
ParkSense sensors are shipped loose. Please Refer to the
Ram Body Builders Guide for more information.
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 18 in (45 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings
to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID) Settings” in Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single solid arc in the left and/or
right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As
the vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to
fast, to continuous.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Single 1/2 Second Tone Slow Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
79-45 in
(200-115 cm)
45-31 in
(115-80 cm)
31-18 in
(80-45 cm)
Less than
18 in (45 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Arc None 4th Solid 3rd
Solid
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Rear chime volume settings are programmable.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the
settings may be programmed through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the
settings may be programmed through the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to dis-
able the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Infor-
mation Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is dis-
abled, the EVIC/DID will display the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE: The ParkSense system will automatically disable
when the system detects that a trailer with trailer brakes
has been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake Mod-
ule. The EVIC/DID will display “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in reverse.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be
OFF when the system is enabled.
If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system is
disabled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED
will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC/DID
will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS⬙ or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not
operate.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
appears in the EVIC/DID, see your authorized dealer.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙. Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
18 in (45 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper while
driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor
problem, causing the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limita-
tions of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-
mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display warning
will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) indicating
the vehicle is above ParkSense operating speed. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense Sensors
For the 3500, 4500 and 5500 Chassis Cab vehicles, the rear
ParkSense sensors are shipped loose. Please Refer to the
Ram Body Builders Guide for more information.
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 18 in (45 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings
to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID) Settings” in Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
ParkSense Display
The warning display will turn ON indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second
tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than 79
in (200 cm)
79-45 in
(200-115 cm)
45-31 in
(115-80 cm)
31-18 in
(80-45 cm)
Less than 18 in
(45 cm)
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than 47
in (120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
None Single 1/2
Second Tone
(for rear only)
Slow (for rear
only)
Fast Continuous
Arcs None 4th Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob-
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are program-
mable.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the
settings may be programmed through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
•
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the
settings may be programmed through the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
ParkSense
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
Front ParkSense switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
Rear ParkSense switch.
When the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is
pushed to disable the system, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID) will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
Front or Rear system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will
display the ⬙FRONT PARKSENSE OFF⬙ or ⬙REAR
PARKSENSE OFF⬙ message for five seconds, followed by
a vehicle graphic with ⬙OFF⬙ in the corresponding side.
This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE: Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system,
will interrupt the five second messages, and the EVIC/
DID will display the vehicle graphic with the correspond-
ing arcs and ⬙OFF⬙ message.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be ON
when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires
service. The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be
OFF when the Front or Rear system is enabled. If the
Front or Rear ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system
requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED
will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙,orthe⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to Reverse and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for
five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or
rear sensor location depending on where the fault is
detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts
for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts
will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙,or⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object is detected
within the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle
graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or ⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙ appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
an authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an
authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, the
instrument cluster will display “FRONT PARKSENSE
OFF” or “REAR PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,
once you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, it remains
off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off, the
instrument cluster will display ⬙FRONT PARKSENSE
OFF⬙ or ⬙REAR PARKSENSE OFF⬙ message for five
seconds, followed by a vehicle graphic with ⬙OFF⬙ in
the corresponding side. This vehicle graphic will be
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
etc. are placed within 18 in (45 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
or open position. A lowered tailgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
(Continued)
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see a image of the
rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE or whenever it is initiated
through ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button in the ⬙Controls⬙ menu.
Whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE, the
image will be displayed in the rearview mirror display (if
equipped) or Uconnect screen (if equipped) along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear.
NOTE: For the 3500, 4500 and 5500 Chassis Cab vehicles,
the Rear Backup Camera is shipped loose and not
installed. Please Refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide
for more information.
The ParkView Camera is located to the left of the tailgate
handle.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
Camera delay turned OFF), the rear Camera mode is
exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
Camera delay turned ON), the rear Camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
⬙REVERSE⬙ unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into ⬙PARK⬙
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button in the ⬙Controls⬙ menu,
a display timer for the image is initiated. The image will
continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds
10 seconds and the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13
km/h) or the touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of
the Rear View Camera image is pressed.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be dis-
played continuously until deactivated via the touch-
screen button ⬙X⬙.
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button
to indicate the current active Camera image being
displayed is made available whenever the Rear View
Camera image is displayed.
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button
to switch the display to Cargo Camera image is
made available whenever the Rear View Camera im-
age is displayed.
A touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of the Cam-
era image is made available when the vehicle is not in
REVERSE gear.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. The active guide lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle.
NOTE: For further information about how to access and
change the programmable features of the ParkView Rear
Backup Camera, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zones Distance to the rear of
the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or
greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the Camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Turning Rear View Camera image On:
1. Press the ⬙Controls⬙ button located on the bottom of
the Uconnect display.
2. Press the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button
to turn the Rear
View Camera system ON.
NOTE: Once initiated by the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button,
the Rear View Camera image may be deactivated by
pressing the ⬙X⬙ soft button. On deactivation, the previ-
ous selected screen will appear.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console is located on the headliner above
the rearview mirror. The overhead console contains the
following features:
• Courtesy/Reading Lights
• Power Sliding Rear Window Switch — If Equipped
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
UNLOCK button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry
Overhead Console
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
(RKE) Key Fob, if equipped. These lights are also oper-
ated individually as reading lights by pushing on the
corresponding lens.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, they will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide
power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the
standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets
and USB Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the
outlet indicating “12V DC,” together with either a key
symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide
power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is
connected to the battery, and can provide power at all
times.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR knob and
element must be used.
The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following
locations:
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Lower left and lower right of the center stack when
equipped with a bench seat.
• Center console when equipped with bucket seats.
Power Outlets — Center Stack
1 — Power Outlet
2 — USB Port (Charge Only)
Power Outlet — Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
• Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment
— if equipped.
• Rear of the center console storage compartment —
Quad Cab or Crew Cab.
USB Port (Charge Only) — Upper Lid Power Outlet — Rear Center Console
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console Fuse Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console Bin /
USB Port (Charge Only)
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear Center Console
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply
power when the key is in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tions.
All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be
removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
There can be up to five auxiliary switches located in the
lower switch bank of the instrument panel which can be
used to power various electronic devices and PTO
(Power Take Off) – If Equipped. If Power Take Off is
equipped, it will take the place of the fifth Auxiliary
switch. Connections to the switches are found under the
hood in the connectors attached to the auxiliary Power
Distribution Center.
You have the ability to configure the functionality of the
auxiliary switches via the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). All
switches can now be configured for setting the switch
type operation to latching or momentary, power source of
either battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state
across key cycles.
NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when
switch type is set to latching and power source is set to
ignition.
For further information on using the auxiliary switches,
please refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide by accessing
www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the appropriate
links.
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.
For vehicles with a bench seat, the cupholder tray can be
used to hold the ash receiver.
For vehicles equipped with a floor console, the cuphold-
ers may be used.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the
center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the
radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset.
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device.
The outlet automatically turns off when the device is
unplugged.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
Power Inverter Outlet
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders (40–20–40 Seats)
The cupholders are located on the backside of the center
portion of the front seat (20). Fold down the center
section of the front seat to gain access to the cupholders.
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor
Storage Bin
For vehicles equipped with bucket seats two cupholders
are located next to the center console storage bin.
Front Cupholders For Bucket Seats
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Rear Cupholders — If Equipped
Some vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders located
in the center armrest.
Some vehicles may be equipped with a rear cupholder
that consists of two cup wells for rear passenger conve-
nience.
Rear Armrest Cupholder
Rear Cup Wells
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel and features both an upper and
lower storage area.
Glove Compartment
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
To open the upper glove compartment push upward on
the handle release. The glove compartment door will
automatically open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull on the handle
to release the latch and lower the glove compartment
door.
Upper Glove Compartment
Lower Glove Compartment
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders (drivers side only) are
located in the door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the driver and
passenger rear door trim panels.
Front Door Storage
Rear Door Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located between the
driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment
provides an armrest and contains both and upper and
lower storage area.
WARNING!
• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or a collision. Only use the center seat-
ing position when the armrest is fully upright.
• In a collision, the latch may open if the total weight
of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
These items could be thrown about endangering
occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should not
exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
Center Storage Compartment
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to
raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a USB
power outlet that can be used to power small electrical
devices, refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” for further
information.
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to
open the lower storage bin.
Upper Storage Compartment
Lower Storage Bin
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
The center console is equipped with a front storage bin
located next to the cupholders. This storage bin may be
equipped with a manual sliding top door.
Front Storage Bin With Door — If Equipped
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and passenger
front seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
Storage (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs
the length of the cab.
Drivers Side Seatback Storage Storage Bin
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Storage and Seats (Crew Cab)
The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under
the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage com-
partment.
To open the storage compartments, lift upward on the
fold flat lid.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab
Models)
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind
the rear seat.
Crew Cab Storage
Grocery Bag Hooks
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Push this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located
on the overhead console.
Push the switch to the right to open the glass. Pull the
switch to the left to close the glass.
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
Rear Window Switch
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........228
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE ..........229
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM ......232
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......235
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............236
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............247
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............261
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights..............263
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights ............264
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) ..............................265
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays — 3.5” Display ................267
▫ Oil Life Reset ........................269
▫ EVIC Messages .......................270
▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items .............273
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) .....284
▫ Driver Information Display (DID) Displays . . .287
▫ Oil Life Reset ........................289
4
▫ DID Messages ........................290
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items ..............293
䡵 CYBERSECURITY.......................306
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................308
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................309
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............310
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 5.0 Personal Settings ............310
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Personal Settings .....325
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ......341
䡵 iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .342
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED .........................343
▫ Radio Operation ......................343
▫ CD Player — If Equipped................344
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...........344
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .345
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information .........345
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................347
▫ Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen —
If Equipped .........................347
▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped .........................352
▫ Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped .........................357
▫ Climate Control Functions ...............363
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......365
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operating Tips .......................366
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR ..............369
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ........370
▫ Introducing Uconnect...................370
▫ Get Started ..........................372
▫ Basic Voice Commands..................373
▫ Radio ..............................375
▫ Media..............................376
▫ Phone..............................378
▫ Voice Text Reply ......................379
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................381
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) ................382
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) ............383
▫ Vehicle Health Alert ...................384
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................384
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) ...............385
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) ..............386
▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) .....................387
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN).........389
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped .............389
▫ Do Not Disturb ......................390
▫ General Information....................390
▫ Additional Information .................391
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Headlight Switch 7 — 115v Power Inverter Outlet 13 — Gear Selector/Transfer Case Position
Switch — If Equipped
2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Power Outlet — If Equipped 14 — Ignition Switch
3 — Radio 9 — Lower Switch Bank 15 — Hood Release
4 — Hazard Switch 10 — Instrument Panel Drawer 16 — Parking Brake Release
5 — Upper Glove Compartment 11 — Climate Controls
6 — Lower Glove Compartment 12 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter — If
Equipped
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
Base EVIC Instrument Cluster
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump arrow symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
Premium DID Instrument Cluster
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
• When the engine is running, the gauge indicates the
electrical system voltage. The pointer should stay
within the normal range if the battery is charged. If
the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and
remains there during normal driving, the electrical
system should be serviced.
NOTE:
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is
caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold heater
system. The number of cycles and the length of the cycling
operation is controlled by the engine control module.
Post-heat operation can run for several minutes, and then
the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize.
3. Oil Pressure Gauge
• The pointer should always indicate some oil pres-
sure when the engine is running. A continuous high
or low reading under normal driving conditions may
indicate a lubrication system malfunction. Immedi-
ate service should be obtained from an authorized
dealer.
4. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump arrow symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
6. Driver Information Display (DID)
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Driver Information Display (DID) mes-
sages. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for fur-
ther information.
7. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains un-
buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is palaced
in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
United States
Canada
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the position ON/RUN position.
The light should illuminate for approximately two sec-
onds. The light should then turn off unless the parking
brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light
does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4
minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tem-
perature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for ser-
vice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further infor-
mation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the en-
gine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer-
gencies.”
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-
hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-
able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Re-
fer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This telltale is on when the Trailer Brake has been disconnected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Door Open Warning Light will differ depending
on the equipped instrument cluster display
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic Sys-
tem called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the en-
gine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ig-
nition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indi-
cate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and
stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has be-
come inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for further in-
formation.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster un-
til the light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Rear Fog Light Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on.
Low Coolant Level Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Coolant Level Indicator Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected.
Cargo Light — If Equipped
Yellow Tell-
tale Light
What It Means
Cargo Light
The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo light is activated by pressing the cargo light but-
ton on the headlight switch.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disen-
gage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
Service 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service 4WD Indicator Light
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not func-
tioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest ser-
vice center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4 Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
4 Low Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide in-
creased torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for fur-
ther information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
4WD Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
2WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
2WD Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the two-wheel drive mode.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT
turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control has been set.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set.
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is set. Refer to “Electronic Speed
Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The EVIC Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Stop/Start Info (If Equipped)
• Trailer Tow
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Vehicle Settings (Not Equipped with a Uconnect 5.0 &
8.4 radio)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following EVIC Control buttons located on
the left side of the steering wheel:
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu items.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu
items.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access/select the information screens or sub-
menu screens of a main menu item. Push and
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds
to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
EVIC Control Buttons
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu, to exit the main menu
push and release the UP or DOWN arrow to
highlight Turn Menu Off, then push and re-
lease the RIGHT arrow.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays — 3.5” Display
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of seven sections:
1. Compass Display
Displays the current direction. Refer to “Compass Settings”
under “Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0/
8.4 Settings” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
2. Temperature Display
Displays the temperature in degrees Celsius or degrees
Fahrenheit.
3. Main Screen
Displays main menu, sub-menus, settings.
4. EVIC White Telltales
5. EVIC Amber Telltales
6. EVIC Red Telltales
7. Audio/Phone Information And Sub-menu Information
Whenever there are sub-menus available, the position
within the sub-menu is shown here.
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in
the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out”
and “Low Tire Pressure.”
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On.”
Oil Life Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display for approximately 10 seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
NOTE: Use the steering wheel controls for the following
procedure(s)
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-
hicle Info.”
3. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
access the “Oil Life” screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
4. Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button for one
second to access the “Oil Life Reset” screen.
5. Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
select “Yes,” then push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to select reset of the Oil Life.
6. Push and release the UP
arrow button to exit the
EVIC screen.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-
hicle Info.”
3. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
access the “Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button for one
second to access the “Oil Life Reset” screen.
5. Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
select “Yes,” then push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to select reset of the Oil Life.
6. Push and release the UP
arrow button to exit the
EVIC screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
EVIC Messages
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Airbag System
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Traction Control Off
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
• Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
• Sound Horn with Remote Lock: Off; 1st Press; 2nd
Press
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Key in Ignition
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Service Airbag System
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Gear Not Available
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Trailer Brake Disconnected
• Service Transmission
• Service Shifter
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
• Washer Fluid Low
• Autostop Duration – If Equipped
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow but-
tons until the desired Selectable Menu item is high-
lighted in the EVIC.
Speedometer Menu Item
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the speedometer menu item is highlighted in the
EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button
to cycle the display between MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info Menu Item
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in the
EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button
to enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info. follow the
directional prompts to access or reset any of the
following Vehicle Info submenu items:
• Tire Pressure
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
• Coolant Temp
• Transmission Temp (Automatic only)
• Oil Temp
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Life
• Battery Voltage
• Gauge Summary
• Engine Hours
Fuel Economy Menu Item
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted.
Push and Hold the RIGHT
arrow button to reset
Average Fuel Economy.
• Current Fuel Economy Gauge
• Average Fuel Economy value
• To reset the following features (Range, Current MPG
or L/100 km, or Average MPG / L/100 km), push hold
the RIGHT
arrow button till features are reset.
• Range to Empty
• Dual Fuel Tank levels — If Equipped
• Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
display the Fuel Tank Level submenu item. Your
EVIC will display the fuel levels of the Front and
Rear fuel tanks. The fuel is automatically trans-
ferred from the Rear tank to the Front tank based on
both tank levels. Fuel transfer is complete once the
Front Fuel Level is greater than the Rear Fuel Level.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip A
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Trip A menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
The Trip A information will display the following:
• Distance
• Average MPG
• Elapsed Time
Push and hold RIGHT
arrow button to reset all
information.
Trip B
Push and release UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Trip B menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
The Trip B information will display the following:
• Distance
• Average MPG
• Elapsed Time
Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button to reset all
the information.
Trailer Tow Menu Item
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted. Push
and release the RIGHT
arrow button and the next
screen will display the following trailer trip
information:
• Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold the
RIGHT
arrow button to reset the distance.
• Trailer Brake
• Output
• Type
• Gain
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
EVIC Messages
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Airbag System
• Traction Control Off
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
• Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Lights On
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On
• Sound Horn with Remote Lock: Off; 1st Press; 2nd
Press
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Key in Ignition
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Service Airbag System
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Gear Not Available
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Trailer Brake Disconnected
• Service Transmission
• Service Shifter
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
• Washer Fluid Low
• Autostop Duration – If Equipped
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
Screen Setup Menu Item
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Screen Setup menu item is highlighted in the
EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button
to enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup
feature allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
location that information is displayed.
Vehicle Settings Menu Item
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until Settings displays in the EVIC.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Follow the prompts to display and set any of the follow-
ing Vehicle Settings.
NOTE: Your vehicle may or may not be equipped with
all the following settings.
• If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touchscreen)
Vehicle Settings will be included in the EVIC.
• If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the Vehicle
Settings will be included in the radio head unit.
Setting Names
Setting Names Ab-
breviated (Left Sub-
menu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
1 Language Select Language English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, Dutch
2 Units Units U.S.; Metric
3 ParkSense ParkSense
• Notification — Sound Only; Sound & Display
• Front Volume — Low; Medium; High
• Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High
4 Tilt Mirror in Re-
verse
Tilt Mirror in R On; Off
5 Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On; Off
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Setting Names
Setting Names Ab-
breviated (Left Sub-
menu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
6 Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist On; Off
7 Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
8 Illuminated Ap-
proach
Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
9 Headlights On with
Wipers
Lights w/ Wipers On; Off
10 Automatic High-
beams
Auto Highbeams On; Off
11 Daytime Running
Lights — If
Equipped
Daytime Lights On; Off
12 Flash Lights with
Lock
Lights w/ Lock On; Off
13 Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On; Off
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Names
Setting Names Ab-
breviated (Left Sub-
menu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
14 Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On; Off
15 Sound Horn with
Remote Start
Horn w/ Rmt Start On; Off
16 Sound Horn with
Remote Lock
Horn w/ Rmt Lock Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
17 Remote Unlock Se-
quence
Remote Unlock Driver Door; All Doors
18 Key Fob Linked to
Memory
Key in Memory On; Off
19 Passive Entry Passive Entry On; Off
20 Remote Start Com-
fort System
Rmt Start Comfort Off; Remoter Start; All starts
21 Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On; Off
22 Key-off Power Delay Power Off Delay Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Setting Names
Setting Names Ab-
breviated (Left Sub-
menu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
23 Commercial Settings Commercial
• Aux Switches
• Power Take-Off
• PIN Setup
• ParkSense Setup
24 Horn w/ Remote
Lower
Horn w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off
25 Lights w/ Remote
Lower
Lights w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off
26 Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4
27 Brake Type Brake Type Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy
EOH
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Names
Setting Names Ab-
breviated (Left Sub-
menu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
28 Trailer Name Trailer Name
• Trailer # (# is equal to slot position)
• Boat
• Car
• Cargo
• Dump
• Equipment
• Flatbed
• Gooseneck
• Horse
• Livestock
• Motorcycle
• Snowmobile
• Travel
• Utility
• 5th Wheel
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Setting Names
Setting Names Ab-
breviated (Left Sub-
menu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
29 Compass Variance Compass Var 1-15 increments of 1
30 Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Cancel; Calibrate
Turn Menu OFF
Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to exit the
main menu.
Push and release any EVIC control button to enter the
EVIC main menu again.
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver-
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
Driver Information Display (DID)
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The DID Menu items consists of the following:
• Digital Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Stop/Start Info (If Equipped)
• Trailer Tow
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Vehicle Settings (Not Equipped with a Uconnect 5.0 &
8.4 radio)
Vehicle Information (Customer Information Features)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
DID Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and
submenus.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access/select the information screens or sub-
menu screens of a main menu item. Push and
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds
to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
• LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu from an info screen or
submenu item.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Driver Information Display (DID) Displays
The DID displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of eight sections:
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
white for on demand information.
2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Informa-
tion — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the
position within the sub-menus is shown here.
3. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG, Trailer Trip
(distance only), Trailer Brake Gain, Time)
4. Telltales/Indicators
5. Gear Selector Status (PRNDL)
6. Selectable Menu Icons
7. 4WD Status
8. Selectable Gauge 2 (Trans Temp, Oil Temp, Oil Life,
Trailer Brake, Current MPG)
9. Selectable Gauge 1 (Trans Temp, Oil Temp, Oil Life,
Trailer Brake, Current MPG)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in
the DID’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out”
and “Low Tire Pressure.”
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On.”
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Life Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the DID display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
NOTE: Use the steering wheel DID controls for the
following procedure(s).
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-
hicle Info.”
3. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
access the “Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button for one
second to access the “Oil Life Reset” screen.
5. Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
select “Yes,” then push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to select reset of the Oil Life.
6. Push and release the UP
arrow button to exit the
DID screen.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
2. Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-
hicle Info.”
3. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
access the “Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button for one
second to access the “Oil Life Reset” screen.
5. Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
select “Yes,” then push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to select reset of the Oil Life.
6. Push and release the UP
arrow button to exit the
DID screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
DID Messages
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Airbag System
• Traction Control Off
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
• Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On
• Sound Horn with Remote Lock: Off; 1st Press; 2nd
Press
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Key in Ignition
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Service Airbag System
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Gear Not Available
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Trailer Brake Disconnected
• Service Transmission
• Service Shifter
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
• Washer Fluid Low
• Autostop Duration – If Equipped
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
DID Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow but-
tons until the desired Selectable Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the DID.
Digital Speedometer
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Digital display icon is
highlighted in the DID. Push and release the
RIGHT
arrow button to change the dis-
play between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Vehicle Info icon is
highlighted in the DID. Push and release the
RIGHT
arrow button to enter the sub-
menus items of Vehicle Info. follow the directional
prompts to access or reset any of the following Vehicle
Info submenu items:
• Tire Pressure:
– Tire Pressure Information System (3500 Series
Heavy Duty Ram Trucks)
– A vehicle ICON is displayed with the tire pressure
values in each corner of the ICON.
– If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
– Tire Pressure is an information only function and
cannot be reset.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
– Refer to the ⬙Tire Pressure Information System
(TPIS)” under ⬙Starting and Operating⬙ for further
information.
• Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
Only
• Oil Temperature
• Oil Life
• Battery Voltage — If Equipped
• Gauge Summary:
– Coolant Temperature
– Transmission Temperature (automatic only)
– Oil Temperature
– Oil Pressure
• Engine Hours
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Fuel Economy Menu icon/title
is highlighted.
Submenu item:
• Range
• Current MPG or L/100 km
• Average MPG or L/100 km
• To reset the following features (Range, Current MPG
or L/100 km, or Average MPG / L/100 km), push hold
the RIGHT
arrow button till features are reset.
• Dual Fuel Tank levels — If Equipped
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
display the Fuel Tank Level submenu item. Your
DID will display the fuel levels of the Front and
Rear fuel tanks.
• The fuel is automatically transferred from the Rear
tank to the Front tank based on both tank levels. Fuel
transfer is complete once the Front Fuel Level is
greater than the Rear Fuel Level.
Trip A
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Trip A icon/title is
highlighted in the DID. The Trip A informa-
tion will display the following:
• Distance MI or km
• Average MPG or L/100 km
• Average MPH or km/h
• Elapsed Time
Hold the RIGHT
arrow button to reset all the
information.
Trip B
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Trip B icon/title is
highlighted in the DID. The Trip B informa-
tion will display the following:
• Distance MI or km
• Average MPG or L/100 km
• Average MPH or km/h
• Elapsed Time
Hold the RIGHT
arrow button to reset all the
information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Trailer Tow
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Trailer Tow icon is
highlighted. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button and the next screen will
display the following trailer trip information:
• Trailer Trip
• Trailer Brake
Audio
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Audio display icon is
highlighted in the DID. Push and release the
RIGHT
arrow button to display the ac-
tive source.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP
arrow button until
the Messages display icon is highlighted in
the DID. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Pushing the
RIGHT
arrow button will allow you to see what
the stored messages are.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Screen Setup display
icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT
arrow button to enter
the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed in
the instrument cluster as well as the location that
information is displayed.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Settings Options
1 Upper Left
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average MPG (not available for CNG
models)
• Current MPG (not available for CNG
models)
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Trailer Trip
• Trailer Brake Gain
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Settings Options
2 Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp. (Default)
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average MPG (not available for CNG
models)
• Current MPG (not available for CNG
models)
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Trailer Trip
• Trailer Brake Gain
3 Lower Left
• None (Default)
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Settings Options
• Range to Empty
• Average MPG (not available for CNG
models)
• Current MPG (not available for CNG
models)
• Trailer Brake Gain
4 Lower Right
• None (Default)
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average MPG (not available for CNG
models)
• Current MPG (not available for CNG
models)
• Trailer Brake Gain
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Settings Options
5 Upper Gauge
• None (Default)
• Trans Temp.
• Oil Temp.
• Oil Life
• Current MPG (not available for CNG
models)
• Trailer Brake Gain
6 Lower Gauge
• None (Default)
• Trans Temp.
• Oil Temp.
• Oil Life
• Current MPG (not available for CNG
models)
• Trailer Brake Gain
7 Odometer
• 000
• 000.0
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Settings Options
8 Restore Defaults
• Cancel
• OK
Vehicles Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
NOTE: This feature is only available on 5.0 and
8.4 Uconnect Radios
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until Personal Settings displays in the DID.
Follow the prompts to display and set any of the follow-
ing Personal Settings.
NOTE: Your vehicle may or may not be equipped with
all the following settings.
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu
Layer)
1 Language Select Language English, Spanish, French, Ital-
ian, German, Dutch
2 Units Units U.S.; Metric
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu
Layer)
3 ParkSense ParkSense
• Notification — Sound Only;
Sound & Display
• Front Volume — Low; Me-
dium; High
• Rear Volume — Low; Me-
dium; High
4 Tilt Mirror in Reverse Tilt Mirror in R On; Off
5 Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On; Off
6 Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist On; Off
7 Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 sec-
onds; 90 seconds
8 Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 sec-
onds; 90 seconds
9 Headlights On with Wipers Lights w/ Wipers On; Off
10 Automatic Highbeams Auto Highbeams On; Off
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu
Layer)
11 Daytime Running Lights Daytime Lights On; Off
12 Flash Lights with Lock Lights w/ Lock On; Off
13 Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On; Off
14 Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On; Off
15 Sound Horn with Remote Start Horn w/ Rmt Start On; Off
16 Sound Horn with Remote Lock Horn w/ Rmt Lock On; Off
17 Remote Unlock Sequence Remote Unlock Driver Door; All Doors
18 Key Fob Linked to Memory Key in Memory On; Off
19 Passive Entry Passive Entry On; Off
20 Remote Start Comfort System Rmt Start Comfort On; Off
21 Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On; Off
22 Key-off Power Delay Power Off Delay Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes;
10 minutes
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu
Layer)
23 Commercial Settings Commercial
• Aux Switches
• Power Take-Off
• PIN Setup
• ParkSense Setup
24 Aero Ride Height Mode Aero Mode On; Off
25 Tire/Jack Mode Tire/Jack Mode On; Off
26 Transport Mode Transport Mode On; Off
27 Wheel Alignment Mode Wheel Alignment On; Off
28 Horn w/ Remote Lower Horn w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off
29 Lights w/ Remote Lower Lights w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off
30 Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3;
Trailer 4
31 Brake Type Brake Type Light Electric; Heavy Electric;
Light EOH; Heavy EOH
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu
Layer)
32 Trailer Name Trailer Name
• Trailer # (# is equal to slot
position)
• Boat
• Car
• Cargo
• Dump
• Equipment
• Flatbed
• Gooseneck
• Horse
• Tag
• Motorcycle
• Snowmobile
• Travel
• Utility
• 5th Wheel
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu
Layer)
33 Compass Variance Compass Var 1-15 increments of 1
34 Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Cancel; Calibrate
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
(Continued)
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING! (Continued)
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-
havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Prac-
tices – If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 radio” in “All
About Uconnect Access” in your Uconnect Owner’s
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru-
ment panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and
Back buttons located below the Uconnect system.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect
touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to
turn the touchscreen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect system.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0 Personal Settings
Push the MORE or SETTINGS button on the faceplate,
then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen (if
equipped) to display the settings menu screen. In this
mode the Uconnect system allows you to access pro-
grammable features that may be equipped such as Dis-
play, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped),
Engine Off Options, Trailer Brake, Audio, Compass Set-
tings, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped),
Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Infor-
mation.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting until the
button is highlighted. Once the setting is complete, either
press the back arrow or Done button on the touchscreen
or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the
previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons
on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will
allow you to toggle up or down through the list of
available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the “Run” position.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available.
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select the Auto or Manual
display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-
lease the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the touchscreen.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English/Français/Español) for all display no-
menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-
tion system (if equipped). Press the “Language” button
on the touchscreen and select from “English,” “Français,”
or “Español.”
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. To
change the Mode status, press and release the “On” or
“Off” button on the touchscreen.
• Fuel Saver Display — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and
will be displayed in the EVIC/DID. Press the “Fuel Saver
Display” button on the touchscreen select from “On” or
“Off.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
• Speed
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
• Capacity
Select from: “gal” (US), “gal” (UK), “L/100 km” or “L.”
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
• Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
• Power
Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”
• Torque
Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Detailed.”
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Com-
mand List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or
“Never.”
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Set Time
When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the “Set Time” button then choose from
a “12 hour” or “24 hour format.” Press the corresponding
arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then
select “AM” or “PM.”
• Set Date
When in this display, you may set the date manually.
Press the “Set Date” button then press the corresponding
arrows above and below the current date to adjust.
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• ParkSense — If Equipped
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re-
lease the “Sound Only” or “Sounds and Display” button.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Refer to “ParkSense” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for system function and operating infor-
mation.
• Front ParkSense Chime Volume
The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System — if
equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To change the mode status, press the “Front
ParkSense Volume” button and select the “Low” “Med”
or “High” buttons on the touchscreen. ParkSense will
retain its last known configuration state through ignition
cycles.
• Rear ParkSense Chime Volume — If Equipped
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be se-
lected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System — if
equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To change the mode status, press the “Rear
ParkSense Volume” button and select the “Low” “Med”
or “High” buttons on the touchscreen. ParkSense will
retain its last known configuration state through ignition
cycles.
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Mirrors
In Reverse” button on the touchscreen and make your
selection.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-
onds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
ParkView Backup Camera Delay push the SETTINGS
button on the faceplate, then the “Safety & Driving
Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
“Parkview Backup camera Delay” button on the touch-
screen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the
windshield. To make your selection, press the “Rain Sens-
ing” button on the touchscreen and make your selection.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control Sys-
tem” in “Starting And Operating” for system function and
operating information. To make your selection, press the
“Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen and make
your selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlight Off Delay
setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen and choose either “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”
buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on when the
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Key Fob. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “Illuminated Approach” button on the touch-
screen and choose either “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” buttons
on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature. To
make your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button
and select from “On” or “Off.”
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, and select from “On”
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or “Off.” Refer to ”Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights w/Lock”
button on the touchscreen, and select from “On” or “Off.”
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit”
button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press the “Horn w/Lock” Button and choose “Off,” “1st
Press” or “2nd Press.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch-
screen and select from “On” or “Off.”
• Remote Door Unlock
This feature will allow you to program your remote door
locks to open “All doors” or only the “Driver door” with
the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob
or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle. To make your
selection, press the “Remote Door Unlock” button on the
touchscreen and choose from “All” or “Driver.”
NOTE: If “Driver Door” is selected, the (RKE) Key Fob
will have to be pushed two times in order to unlock all
doors.
• Memory Linked to Fob — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory
Linked to Fob” button on the touchscreen and select from
“On” or “Off.”
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location if “Memory Linked to Fob” is set to (ON) when
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob is used to
unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
• Passive Entry — If Equipped
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) Key Fob lock or unlock buttons. It automatically
unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
grabbed. To make your selection, press the “Passive
Entry” button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or
“Off.” Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen, and select from
“On” or “Off.”
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated
Seats” button on the touchscreen, then select either “On”
or “Off.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seats”
button on the touchscreen and make your selection.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. Press the “Headlight Off Delay”
button on the touchscreen and choose from “0,” “30,”
“60,” or “90” seconds to select your desired time interval.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. Press the “En-
gine Off Power Delay” button on the touchscreen and
choose from “0 sec,” “45 sec,” “5 min” or “10 min” to
select your desired time interval.
Trailer Brake
After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Trailer Select
When this feature is selected, the Trailer Type can be
selected between “Trailer 1,” “Trailer 2,” “Trailer 3” and
“Trailer 4.”
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Trailer Brake Type
When this feature is selected, the Trailer Brake Type can
be changed between “Light Electric,” “Heavy Electric,”
“Light EOH” and “Heavy EOH.” Refer to “Integrated
Trailer Brake Module” in “Starting And Operating.”
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touch-
screen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on
the touchscreen.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
• Loudness — If Equipped
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on
the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Lap-
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Compass Variance Map
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Perform Compass Calibration
Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to
change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating,
which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass.
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass
by pressing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will
now function normally.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to exclude undesirable
channels while scanning. To make your selection, press
the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the
channels you would like to skip.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
“Restore Settings” button and select from “Yes” or “No.”
If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you
sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select
“Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove all
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and select from “Yes” or “No.” If “Yes” is selected a
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to clear
all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “Cancel” to exit.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following information will be available:
• System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Information
screen will appear displaying the system software version.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
8.4A/8.4AN Personal Settings
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen then press
the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the
settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if
equipped), Engine Off Options, Trailer Brake, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore
Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the back arrow button on the touchscreen or
the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down
Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
list of available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the “Run” position.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available.
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, select from
“Day,” “Night” or “Auto” until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
even though the headlights are on.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–”setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Set Theme
This feature will allow you to choose a background
theme for the display screen. The theme will change the
background color, highlight color, and button color of the
display screen. Press the “Set Theme” button on the
touchscreen and select one of the pre-configured themes
available.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi-
gation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lan-
guage button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has
been selected.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Controls Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the “Controls Screen
Time-Out” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Fuel Saver Display — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and
will be displayed in the DID. Press the “Fuel Saver
Display” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
• Speed
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
• Capacity
Select from: “gal” (US), “gal” (UK), “L/100 km” or “L.”
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
• Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
• Power
Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”
• Torque
Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”
After the desired setting has been selected, press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, select from the “Brief” or “Detailed” buttons on
the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Com-
mand List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, select from the “Always,” “With Help” or
“Never” buttons on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen to
turn the feature on or off.
• Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must not be
selected. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
• Set Time Minutes
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down.
• Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen and select from “12hrs” or “24hrs.”
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen to turn the feature on or off.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able.
• ParkSense
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in
REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only
or Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status,
select the “Sound Only” or the “Sound and Display”
button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park
Assist” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for system function and operating information.
• Front ParkSense Chime Volume
The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System — if
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To change the mode status, press the “Front
ParkSense Volume” button and select the “Low” “Med”
or “High” buttons on the touchscreen. ParkSense will
retain its last known configuration state through ignition
cycles.
• Rear ParkSense Chime Volume
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be se-
lected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System — if
equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To change the mode status, press the “Rear
ParkSense Volume” button and select the “Low” “Med”
or “High” buttons on the touchscreen. ParkSense will
retain its last known configuration state through ignition
cycles.
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir-
rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN
position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse” button on the touchscreen to select
from on or off.
• ParkView Backup Camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, press the “ParkView Backup Camera” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
the setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back
Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see Active
(Dynamic) Guidelines which deflect with steering wheel
angle over the ParkView Back up Camera display whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To
make your selection, press the “ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guidelines” and select from on or off.
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph. To make your selection, press
the “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” button on the
touchscreen to select from on or off.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen to select from
on or off.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen to select
from on or off.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the
seconds up or down.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key
Fob. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” buttons
on the touchscreen to adjust the seconds up or down.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” but-
ton on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press the “Auto Dim High Beams”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Refer to “Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lamps will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
with Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
Lock” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE Key Fob. This feature may be selected with
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights With Lock”
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn With Lock” button on the touch-
screen and select from “Off”, “1st Press” or “2nd Press”.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is
selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob UN-
LOCK button you must push the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK
button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When
Unlock “All Doors” On 1st Press is selected, all of the
doors will unlock on the first push of the RKE Key Fob
UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors”, all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed
pushing the handle more than once will only result in the
driver’s door opening. If driver door is selected, once the
driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock
switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE Key
Fob).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
• Passive Entry — If Equipped
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) Key Fob lock or unlock buttons. To make your
selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the touch-
screen until a check-mark appears next to setting, show-
ing that setting has been selected. Refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle”.
• Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Personal
Settings Linked To Key Fob” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob is set to
ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob is
used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated
Seats” button on the touchscreen, then select either “Off,”
“Remote Start” or “All Starts”.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the time delay up or
down.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection press
the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the
seconds up or down.
Trailer Brake
After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Trailer Select
When this feature is selected, the Trailer Type can be
selected between “Trailer 1,” “Trailer 2,” “Trailer 3” and
“Trailer 4.” To make your selection, scroll up or down
until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
• Trailer Brake Type
When this feature is selected, the Trailer Brake Type can
be changed between “Light Electric,” “Heavy Electric,”
“Light EOH” and “Heavy EOH.” To make your selection,
scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high-
lighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected. Refer to “Integrated Trailer
Brake Module” in “Starting And Operating.”
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touch-
screen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on
the touchscreen.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
• Loudness — If Equipped
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on
the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the begin-
ning when you tune to a music channel using one of the
twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This
feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that
current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you
will not even realize it’s on, except that you will miss the
experience of joining your favorite song with only a few
seconds left to play. To make your selection, press the “Tune
Start” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
“Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen and pop-up
will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
settings to default?” select “OK” to restore, or “Cancel” to
exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears
stating ⬙Settings Reset To Default.⬙
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal Data Cleared.”
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Informa-
tion screen will appear displaying the system software
version.
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Located inside the center console upper lid, this feature
allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into
the USB port.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod
and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may
not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or visit UconnectPhone.com.
Center Console USB/AUX SD Card Media Hub
1 — USB Port
2 — SD Card Slot
3 — Aux Jack
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the back
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio, CD or other valid audio
sources.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
Remote Sound System Controls (Rearview Of Steering
Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set buttons.
CD Player — If Equipped
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track. If you push the switch up or down three
times, it will play the third, etc.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat-
ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile device operation when
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
community.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emit-
ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-
ference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen —
If Equipped
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Manual Climate Controls
1 — Front Blower 5 — MAX A/C
2 — Temperature Control 6 — Air Conditioning (A/C)
3 — MODE Control 7 — DEFROST Mode
4 — RECIRCULATION Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Front Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of
air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle
may be equipped with four blower speeds.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the knob coun-
terclockwise, from top center into the
blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clock-
wise, into the red area, indicates
warmer temperatures.
Air Conditioning Operation
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illu-
minate when the A/C system is
engaged.
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the
A/C is turned on automatically and the air is
recirculated.
NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
button is pushed. If your air conditioning performance
seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accu-
mulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
spray from behind the radiator and through the con-
denser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow
to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
from several patterns of air distribu-
tion. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Bi-Level Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side win-
dow demist outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C
button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help
dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these
modes only when necessary.
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation Control
Push the Recirculation Control button to
choose between outside air intake or recircula-
tion of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
illuminate when you are in Recirculation
mode. Only use the Recirculation mode to temporarily
block out any outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool
the interior rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or
humid weather.
NOTE:
• If the RECIRCULATION button is pushed when the
system is in Defrost mode, the Recirculation LED
indicator will flash three times and then turn off to
indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the outside air position.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection by pushing the A/C
button.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control
airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem-
perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If
Equipped
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the radio
touchscreen.
Climate Controls — Buttons On The Faceplate
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the radio.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate and Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
when MAX A/C is ON. In MAX A/C, the blower level
and mode position can be adjusted to desired user
settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch to the prior settings and the MAX
A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Temperature Controls — Buttons On The Touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting; the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demister outlets. This mode works
best in cold or snowy conditions.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not
pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind-
shield. To improve fuel economy, utilize these modes
only when required.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
7. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either buttons on the
faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
8. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
9. Temperature Control Down Button
Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature
settings. On the touchscreen, slide the temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button for cooler temperature
settings.
10. Temperature Control Up Button
Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature
settings. On the touchscreen, slide the temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button for cooler temperature
settings.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control
knob when this button is selected. Push the button a
second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and
allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto-
matically if these modes are selected.
Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect screen.
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7.
Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect 8.4)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as
follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demis-
ter outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
13.
Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect 8.4)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow for cooler tem-
perature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14.
Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate button for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect 5.0)
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-
tures.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
of the windows.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
when MAX A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button
on the touchscreen or faceplate. Recirculation mode
should only be used temporarily. The recirculation LED
button on the faceplate will illuminate when either
button is selected. Push either button a second time to
turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside
air into the vehicle.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button on the
faceplate to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the
“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger tem-
perature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the
touchscreen. Once the desired temperature is dis-
played, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the temperature. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and
blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the Uconnect customer-programmable fea-
ture. Refer to the “Uconnect System Settings” in this
section of the manual.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automati-
cally.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging and Frosting
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost on
the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front
blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without
A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au-
tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce
or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In winter months, ensure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush and snow.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
Operating Tips Chart
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 3.0, 5.0 or
8.4A/8.4AN system.
Uconnect 3.0
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
Uconnect 5.0 Uconnect 8.4AN
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-
structions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Two buttons are all you need to control your Uconnect
system with your voice.
Voice Recognition (VR)/Phone Buttons
1 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the screen.
Uconnect 3.0
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Uconnect 5.0 Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: For the Uconnect 5.0 and 8.4A/8.4AN systems, press
the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the
music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and
genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated for the Uconnect 5.0 and 8.4A/AN radios, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say Listen. (Must have com-
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say:
• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
WiFi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
Assist Button
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen to
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
Mobile App
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
your personalized music.
NOTE:
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
• Once you download the app to your compatible
mobile device, you will also be able to start your
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually any-
where.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-
sage to John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
process your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch-
screen, push the VR button
, then say: “YELP
search.”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP:
Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings, set
reminders, and more. For further information go to the
Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
SiriusXM Travel Link
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve-
nience, there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-
ters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
For Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours
a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................398
▫ Normal Starting.......................398
▫ Automatic Transmission ................399
▫
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or −29°C)
. .399
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................399
▫ After Starting ........................401
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED. . . .401
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............401
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............403
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .404
▫ Six–Speed Automatic Transmission —
If Equipped .........................404
䡵 POWER TAKE OFF OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED (CHASSIS CAB ONLY) ........416
▫ Stationary Mode ......................416
▫ Mobile Mode.........................418
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED .........................419
▫
Manually Shifted Transfer Case —
If Equipped ..........................419
5
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Four-Position Switch) — If Equipped .......423
䡵 LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL .............429
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........430
▫ Acceleration .........................430
▫ Traction ............................430
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............431
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................431
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................431
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................433
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ..............434
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................434
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................437
▫ Hydraulic Brake Assist..................437
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .437
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .438
▫ Brake System Warning Light..............438
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............438
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light............440
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............441
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................441
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............444
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........445
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........449
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..............450
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . .451
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............454
▫ Tire Markings ........................454
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........459
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........460
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........462
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........467
▫ Tire Pressure ........................467
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................468
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .470
▫ Tire Maintenance And Replacement.........470
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................471
▫ Tire Types ...........................471
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............473
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............473
▫ Tire Spinning ........................476
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................476
▫ Life Of Tire .........................477
▫ Replacement Tires .....................477
䡵 SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE
INFORMATION — IF EQUIPPED ...........479
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......479
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....481
▫ Dual Rear Wheels .....................483
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .484
▫ Base System — If Equipped ..............487
▫ Premium System ......................487
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
▫ Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
Chassis Cab — If Equipped ..............492
▫ General Information....................493
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................494
▫ 6.4L Engine ..........................494
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................494
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............495
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......495
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................496
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................496
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................497
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............498
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................498
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............499
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................500
▫ Certification Label ....................500
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................502
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............502
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............507
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ......................508
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............508
▫ Towing Requirements ..................508
▫ Towing Tips .........................517
䡵 SNOWPLOW .........................519
▫ Before Plowing .......................519
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability . . .520
▫ Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached............................520
▫ Operating Tips .......................521
▫ General Maintenance ...................521
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................522
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .522
▫ Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models .............................523
▫ Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models .............................524
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more than 10-second
intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such intervals will
protect the starter from overheating.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal. Cycle the ignition to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition to the OFF position,
wait five seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
or PARK. Apply the brake before shifting into any
driving range.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
pressed to shift out of PARK.
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter
motor will continue to run but will automatically disen-
gage when the engine is running.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while the engine is cranking. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the igni-
tion button/key is released. If this occurs, continue
cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to
the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the ignition
button/key once the engine is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 10 second
period of engine cranking with the accelerator pedal held
to the floor, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de-
crease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
Gasoline Engine Only
The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille
by the right front tow hook.
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered
strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not
in use for the Winter months. During Winter months,
remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on
the c-clip.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift an
automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, turn
the engine OFF, apply the parking brake, and
remove the ignition key. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, an automatic
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-
hicle against unwanted movement.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF (key removal) position. The Key Fob can only be
removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in
PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF
position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
Key Fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped but the Key Fob cannot be removed until
you obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in
PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the trans-
mission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Six–Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped
Chassis Cab models (with automatic transmission) may
use either the AS66RC transmission (which is equipped
with a Power Take-Off (PTO) access cover on the side of
the transmission case), or the 66RFE transmission (which
has no PTO access cover).
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
The gear selector is mounted on the right side of the
steering column. You must press the brake pedal to move
the gear selector out of PARK (refer to “Brake/
Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To
drive, move the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to
the DRIVE position. Pull the gear selector toward you
when shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting
out of PARK.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, RE-
VERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual
downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range
Select [ERS] Operation” in this section for further infor-
mation). Pushing the ERS (-/+) switches (on the gear
selector) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will display that
gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Models
with the Driver Information Display (DID) will display
both the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear,
while in ERS mode.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
cult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
(Continued)
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key re-
moval) position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. If equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN posi-
tion. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the gear selector out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
CAUTION! (Continued)
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• When shifting into PARK, pull the gear selector to-
ward you and move it all the way counterclockwise
until it stops.
• Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully
seated in the PARK gate.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth and
sixth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv-
ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range
Select (ERS) Operation” in this section for further infor-
mation) to select a lower gear range. Under these condi-
tions, using a lower gear range will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift-
ing and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger
of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a
significant additional heat load on the cooling system.
Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible
gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL
(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this
excess heat generation.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section).
On models with 66RFE transmission, top overdrive gear
is also inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm, and
during extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
below), operation may briefly be limited to first and
direct gears only. On trucks with AS66RC transmission,
fifth and sixth gears may be inhibited briefly on cold
starts below 41°F (5°C), and during very cold tempera-
tures (-4°F [-20°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. During this condition, the
ability of the vehicle to accelerate under heavily loaded
conditions may be reduced. In all cases, normal operation
will resume once the transmission temperature has risen
to a suitable level.
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear (for 66RFE transmission) or third gear (for
AS66RC transmission) regardless of which forward gear
is selected. If an AS66RC equipped truck enters Limp
Home Mode at highway speeds, it will initially engage
fifth gear, until the vehicle slows to a speed where third
gear can be engaged. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL
will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the
vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service
without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the
transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the
transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmis-
sion will not shift above fourth gear, but will shift
through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-)
switch will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top
available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+) will
change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the ERS (+)
switch until the gear limit display disappears from the
instrument cluster.
Column Gear Selector
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply push and hold the
ERS (-) switch. The transmission will shift to the range
from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
CAUTION!
When using ERS for engine braking while descend-
ing steep grades, be careful not to overspeed the
engine. Apply the brakes as needed to prevent en-
gine overspeed.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth and sixth gears). The trans-
mission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the
following conditions are present:
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature.
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
ture.
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/
HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the trans-
mission will automatically downshift (for engine brak-
ing) when the throttle is closed and/or during steady
braking maneuvers.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
has been activated. Pushing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. Normal operation is always
the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is
TOW/HAUL Switch
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
desired, the switch must be pushed each time the engine
is started.
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving
in icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine
braking can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the
vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of
vehicle control, which may cause an accident possi-
bly resulting in personal injury or death.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage (and
66RFE-equipped trucks will not shift to sixth gear),
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are
warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving].
Because engine speed is higher when the torque con-
verter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting properly when cold. This is
normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm,
will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift
into and out of Overdrive.
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque con-
verter will refill within five seconds after starting the
engine.
POWER TAKE OFF OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED
(CHASSIS CAB ONLY)
This vehicle when equipped with PTO Prep and the
AS66RC automatic six-speed, will allow for an aftermar-
ket upfit with a transmission driven PTO (power take
off). The customer will have the ability to operate the
PTO in either a “stationary” or “mobile” mode. The
vehicles will be factory set to the “stationary” mode. To
select “mobile” mode, you will need to enter the com-
mercial vehicle menu on the EVIC/DID screen and select
mobile PTO mode. Details of the PTO selection modes
and further PTO information is available at the Ram
Truck Bodybuilders web site. www.rambodybuilder.com
AS66RC Six-Speed Automatic Transmission Only
The PTO drive gear (part of the AS66RC) operates at
torque converter turbine speed. The turbine speed will be
less than engine speed when the torque converter clutch
is not engaged and will be same as engine speed when
the torque converter clutch is engaged.
Stationary Mode
To operate the PTO in this mode the vehicle must meet
the following conditions:
• Be in PARK position (vehicles equipped with auto-
matic transmission.)
• PTO switch has been activated.
• Parking brake applied (vehicles equipped with
manual transmission).
• Brake pedal must not be applied.
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Vehicle engine must be running.
• No vehicle, brake or clutch switch faults present.
• PTO must be correctly installed using the vehicle
provided circuits.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID) will display a ⬙PTO
On⬙ message for five seconds if the above conditions are
met. Otherwise, the EVIC/DID will display a message
⬙To Operate PTO Shift To Park⬙ indicating what operator
action should be taken to engage the PTO mode.
The customer has the choice to operate the PTO by
utilizing the cruise control switches or by utilizing a
remote control (provided by the PTO supplier). To oper-
ate the feature using the cruise control switches, the
customer must first activate the PTO switch which will
turn on the PTO. In order to increase or decrease the
engine idle speed, to optimize the PTO function, the
“RESUME/ACCEL” and “DECEL” cruise switches can
be used respectively. To disengage PTO operation and
return to “standard vehicle operation” simply toggle the
PTO switch to the OFF position.
The torque converter clutch (TCC) will automatically
engage at engine speeds above 1,200 RPM (engine speed)
in PTO stationary mode. Once engaged, the TCC will
remain applied and will not disengage until the engine
speed falls below 1,000 RPM. TCC engagement is desir-
able for certain types of PTO applications (Automatic
Transmission Only).
To operate the PTO via a remote switch, the customer
must make sure the above conditions are met. It is vital
for proper operation that the PTO and remote have been
installed correctly, paying special attention to ensure the
vehicle provided wiring has been connected properly.
This is the responsibility of the installer of the PTO and
switches/remote system. It is the responsibility of the
PTO manufacturer to ensure that their electrical (switches
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
and remote) system is compatible with the vehicle’s
electrical architecture and software functionality.
NOTE: Single set speed can be programmed via the PTO
menu on the EVIC/DID screen. Further details are avail-
able at the Ram Truck Bodybuilders web site located
atwww.rambodybuilder.com.
Mobile Mode
To operate the PTO in this mode the vehicle must meet
the following conditions:
• Mobile mode is activated via the menu on the EVIC/
DID screen.
• (ON/OFF) switch has been activated.
• Vehicles with automatic transmission must be in PARK
or DRIVE.
• Parking brake must not be applied.
• Brake pedal must not be applied.
• No vehicle, brake or clutch switch faults present.
• Vehicle engine must be running.
• PTO must be correctly installed using the vehicle
provided circuits.
The customer may choose to use the PTO while the
vehicle is moving. To do so, the PTO function must be
activated prior to taking the vehicle out of PARK. This is
accomplished by activating the upfitter-provided PTO
on/off switch. At this point, the customer may place the
vehicle in a forward or reverse gear and have PTO
operation once the vehicle begins to move. To disengage
PTO operation and return to “standard vehicle opera-
tion” simply toggle the on/off switch to the OFF position.
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: For application specific information with respect
to PTO and pump requirements and additional vehicle
information (wiring schematics, preset idle values, en-
gine speed limits, and vehicle hardware and software
requirements) please refer to the Body Builders Guide by
accessing www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the
appropriate links.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a
manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted
transfer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your
transfer case, located in this section for further informa-
tion.
Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
• Two-wheel drive high range (2H)
• Four-wheel drive high range (4H)
• Neutral (N)
• Four-wheel drive low range (4L)
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions such
as dry, hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L
positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive-
shafts together and force the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply
moving the gear selector to the desired positions once the
appropriate speed and gear requirements are met, refer
to “Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer Case”
in this section for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on
dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear
and damage to the driveline components.
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is
in four-wheel drive and that the front and rear drive-
shafts are locked together. This light will illuminate when
the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L
position. There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL
positions on some models.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
can cause damage to the drivetrain.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear
driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold tempera-
tures.
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2H
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced
roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range locks the
front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional
traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Neutral (N)
Neutral — This range disengages the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the
front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the
vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware dam-
age can result.
Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted Transfer
Case
2H To 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,
shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera-
tor pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant
force when shifting the transfer case lever.
2H Or 4H To 4L
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
transfer case NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
• Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission may require
shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL, hold foot on brake, and
turn the engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.
• Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due
to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).
• Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the
transmission is in gear.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front
axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Four-Position Switch) — If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four
mode positions:
• Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
• Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
Transfer Case Switch (Four-Position)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced
roads.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to
maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
desired position.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
shifting instructions.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
by pushing the button located on the lower left hand
corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the indicator
lights will do the following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-
tinue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
case, located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it
means that the four-wheel drive system is not function-
ing properly and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not
to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock Range — This range maximizes
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous
position will remain ON and the newly selected posi-
tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the
requirements for the selected position have been met.
To retry a shift: return the control knob back to the
original position, make certain all shift requirements
have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift
again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD To 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn-
ing the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position with the
engine either running or off. This shift cannot be com-
pleted if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
NOTE:
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels
are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
position indicator light will flash and the original position
indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed
and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use
either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the
shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash
continuously while the original position indicator light
is ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, the shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when
there is a difference between the traction characteristics
of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit per-
forms similarly to a conventional differential. On slip-
pery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better
traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator
will supply maximum traction. When starting with only
one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight
momentary application of the parking brake may be
necessary to gain maximum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
WARNING! (Continued)
wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for im-
proved handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
(Continued)
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if
a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or
the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate
inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied, the engine is off and the Key Fob
is removed from the ignition switch. Also, be certain to
leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or manual
transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
parking brake, firmly push the parking brake pedal fully.
To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake
release handle.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
Parking Brake Release
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-
mission in PARK, a manual transmission in RE-
VERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
braking capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This
will be evident by increased pedal travel during applica-
tion, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
activation of the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS
Warning Light” (if equipped) during brake use.
The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-
boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering
system. You may experience some clicking or hissing
noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking
conditions.
NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches
operating temperature.
Hydraulic Brake Assist
The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-
boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering
system. You may experience some clicking or hissing
noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking
conditions.
NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches
operating temperature.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
tions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS acti-
vates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi-
cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve-
hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-
tion is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac-
tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Dis-
play (DID), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC/DID, perform
the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
turn on and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ-
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen-
tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC
system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-
evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode.
Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to
return to ESC On.
NOTE:
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter
the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch
for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound,
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
“ESC OFF” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if
equipped.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode
is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further informa-
tion.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer
from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set
speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be
adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
activate
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE: During HDC, the +/- shifter input is used for
HDC target speed selection but will not affect the gear
chosen by the transmission. When actively controlling
HDC, the transmission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving con-
ditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
the following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni-
tude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
about the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to
excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control-
ling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Term Definition
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-
sure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Con-
sult this manual to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Tire Maintenance And Replacement
You should follow all maintenance procedures specified
by the manufacturer of this vehicle’s tires. The tires
originally installed on this vehicle were designed to
conform to EPA greenhouse gas standards and NHTSA
fuel economy standards.
If you need to replace your tires, you should do so with
tires that meet those standards. Check with your autho-
rized dealer or with the tire manufacturer for appropriate
replacement tires.
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service
Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for
further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare
tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
— IF EQUIPPED
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-
gers [150 lbs (68 kg) each] plus 200 lbs (90 kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on the face of the driver’s door.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
Please follow the table below for proper tire size, chain
type, and axle recommendations:
Vehicle Axle Recommendations Tire Sizes Chain Class
Chassis Cab 3500 (Single
Rear Wheel) Models
Rear Only LT265/70R18E U Class
Chassis Cab 3500 (Dual
Rear Wheel) 4X2 Models
Rear Only LT235/80R17E U Class
Chassis Cab 3500 (Dual
Rear Wheel) 4X4 Models
Front/Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
Chassis Cab 4500/5500
Models
Rear Only 225/70R19.5G U Class
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE: On Canadian vehicles only, if your vehicle is
equipped with All-Season type tires on the front and
On/Off Road type tires mounted on the rear, do not use
a front to back rotation pattern. Instead, rotate your tires
side to side at the recommended intervals.
Tire Rotation
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Dual Rear Wheels
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all
four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Information System (TPIS):
• The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses
unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to help identify
them from the outer rear wheels, because of this, the
inner and outer wheel locations can’t be switched.
• After a tire rotation is completed, as shown below, the
system can auto learn the locations of each sensor ID.
Auto learning/localization occurs when the vehicle
ignition status is changed from Off to On and speeds of
greater than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained and remain
over 5mph (8km/h) for at about a 15 minute period.
You may need to drive for 20 minutes to account
slower speeds and stops.
• If the tires are rotated incorrectly, the Auto localization
of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate correctly resulting
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
in incorrect locations for the pressure values displayed
in the Instrument Cluster.
CAUTION!
• 4500/5500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one
approved direction of rotation. This is to accommo-
date the asymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the
On/Off road tire.
• When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to be
remounted on the rim or installed at a different
location to maintain the correct placement of the
tire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position
on the vehicle. For example, if the spare is used to
replace an outer rear tire it will have to be re-
mounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished
inward. That way the tread design of asymmetrical
tires will maintain proper position.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The
system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27
psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light.”
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors
• TPM Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare
can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The
TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare
when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare
with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not
cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
illuminate or the chime to sound.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver In-
formation Display (DID)
• TPM Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be
used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a
pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or
the chime to sound while it is stored in the spare tire
location.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the EVIC/DID will
display a “LOW TIRE” message and a graphic showing
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will
also be displayed.
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
in a different color in the EVIC/DID graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC/DID will return to it’s original color, and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a ⬙SER-
VICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” Message
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicles With Matching Full Size Spare
• The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
• If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will turn ON. In addition, the EVIC/DID will
display a “LOW TIRE” message and a graphic show-
ing the low tire pressure value in a different color. An
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the pressure value
will be updated and return to it’s original color, as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires.
Vehicles With Non Matching Full Size Spare Or Com-
pact Spare
• The non matching full size spare or compact spare tire
does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the non matching full size
spare or compact spare tire.
• If you install the non matching full size spare or
compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon
the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM Telltale Light
and a “LOW TIRE” message will remain ON and a
chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
EVIC/DID will still display a flashing pressure value
or a pressure value in a different color.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC/DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC/
DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
•
Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the non matching
full size spare or compact spare, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPM Telltale Light will
turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC/DID will display
a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) Chassis
Cab — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Pressure
Information System (TPIS).
The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses wire-
less technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sen-
sors to transmit tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to
each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPIS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors (Single Rear Wheel [SRW] applica-
tions)
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Six TPM sensors (Dual Rear Wheel [DRW] applica-
tions)
• Pressure display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)
The TPIS system will display all four (Single Rear Wheel
[SRW] applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel [DRW]
applications) tire pressure values EVIC/DID display.
If a system fault is detected, the EVIC/DID will display a
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
will no longer be displayed, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2)
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
6.4L Engine
This engines is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satis-
factory fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded gaso-
line having a posted octane number
range of 87 to 89 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane
“Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum performance
and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emis-
sions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause
the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly communi-
cate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Modifications that allow the engine to run on com-
pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of deter-
gents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of Top Tier
Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal con-
ditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (fuel filler cap). A poorly fitting
cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also,
a poorly-fitted aftermarket cap can cause the MIL
(Malfunction Indicator Light) to illuminate due to
fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to
turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the
fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running. This is in violation of most state and
federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to
turn on.
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap ¼ turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
tightened.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC/DID telltale display
area. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the RIGHT
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
button to turn off the message. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg) or
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear
GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification La-
bel” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability and braking
performance and could result in a collision.
• Weight distributing systems may not be compat-
ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a
coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle
in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel
trailer with a coupling king pin.
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch In-
dustry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
Duty
10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Fifth Wheel/Gooseneck Greater than 10,000 lbs
(4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drive-
train.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca (Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading In-
formation Placard” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
WARNING! (Continued)
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
•
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire re-
placement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
1,653 lbs (749 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Mod-
ule (ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic
(EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE: This module has been designed and verified with
electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydraulic
systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be com-
patible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the right to
activate power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent
of the tow vehicle’s brakes. If the manual brake control
lever is activated while the brake is also applied, the
greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to
the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or
sliding the manual brake control lever will display the
GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated
Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control
power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The
GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or
decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control
for the specific towing condition and should be changed
as towing conditions change. Changes to towing condi-
tions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions
and weather.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally and properly ad-
justed. See your trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connec-
tions according to the trailer manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged
in, the trailer connected message should appear in the
EVIC/DID (if the connection is not recognized by the
ITBM, braking functions will not be available), the
GAIN setting will illuminate and the correct type of
trailer must be selected from the EVIC/DID options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel
until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
“TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until Trailer Brake
Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type
appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h)
and squeeze the manual brake control lever com-
pletely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels
turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier
trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even
with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Type of Trailer
Brakes
Electric Trailer
Brakes
Electric Trailer
Brakes
Electric over Hy-
draulic Trailer
Brakes
Electric over Hy-
draulic Trailer
Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs
* The suggested selection depends and may change
depending on the customer preferences for braking per-
formance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and
road state may also affect the selection.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
EVIC/DID Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information
Display (DID). Display messages, along with a single
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is deter-
mined in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or
on the trailer. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop-
ping distance or trailer instability which could result
in damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop-
ping distance or trailer instability which could result
in personal injury.
NOTE:
• An aftermarket controller may be available for use
with trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer
brake systems. To determine the type of brakes on
your trailer and the availability of controllers, check
with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
• Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may
cause damage to the electrical system and electronic
modules of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if
an aftermarket module is to be installed.
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
WARNING!
Any work done to the vehicle’s electrical system or
wiring should be performed by a qualified automo-
tive technician. If done improperly it may cause
damage to the electrical system wiring and could
result in serious or fatal injury.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL
mode or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control).
NOTE: Using TOW/HAUL mode, or selecting a lower
gear range (using the ERS shift control) while operating
the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at low
speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or below), holding your
vehicle in first gear (using the ERS shift control) can help
to avoid transmission overheating.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
If you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of
continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid
and filter(s) as specified for ⬙police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.⬙ Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for
the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, activate TOW/HAUL mode when driving in hilly
areas, or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control) on more severe grades.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOWPLOW
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
installed option. These packages include components
necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
recommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow
the recommendations contained within the current Ram
Body Builders Guide. See your authorized dealer, in-
staller or snowplow manufacturer for this information.
There are unique electrical systems that must be con-
nected to properly assure operator safety and prevent
overloading vehicle systems.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as de-
scribed earlier in this manual.
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exte-
rior lamps are not properly installed.
Before Plowing
• Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
level.
• Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tight-
ness.
• Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
The cutting edge should be ¼ to ½ in (6 cm to 1.2 cm)
above ground in snow plowing position.
• Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func-
tioning properly.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Ram Body
Builders Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck
should not exceed two.
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear
GAWR should never be exceeded.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
options or passengers, etc.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers,
options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR)
ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Com-
pliance Certification Label on the driver’s side door
opening.
NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting pas-
sengers.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifica-
tions at the factory without consideration for the weight
of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset
if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow
season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip-
ment following the recommendations provided by the
specific snowplow manufacturer.
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
completely and position it as low as road or surface
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The
operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance
and allow adequate passing clearance.
Operating Tips
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
should be maximum operating speed. The operator
should be familiar with the area and surface to be
cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when
plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
General Maintenance
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
plow manufacturer’s instructions.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery
terminals clean and free of corrosion.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drive-
train damage, the following precautions should be ob-
served.
• Operate with transfer case in 4LO when plowing small
or congested areas where speeds are not likely to
exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in
4HI.
• Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4LO
range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended
periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
• Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
practice of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting
the transmission.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF
The Ground
Two-Wheel
Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT AL-
LOWED
See Instructions
• Automatic transmission in PARK
• Manual transmission in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL)
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow Front NOT AL-
LOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE: When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic trans-
mission in PARK, manual transmission in gear (not in
NEUTRAL).
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the Key Fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for tow-
ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
• Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may
leak from the transmission, causing damage to
internal parts.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer
cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recreational
towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted into
PARK for recreational towing. Manual transmissions
must be placed in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recre-
ational towing. Refer to the following for the proper
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure for your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK
for recreational towing.
• Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not
in Neutral) for recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper tow-
ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
(Continued)
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid
will leak from the transfer case, causing damage to
internal parts.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running. Firmly apply the parking brake.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
5. Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL:
• With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer
case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
• With electronic shift transfer case, push and hold the
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button. Some models
have a small, recessed ⬙N⬙ button (at the center of the
transfer case switches) that must be pressed using a
ballpoint pen or similar object. Other models have a
rectangular NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary
transfer case control knob. The NEUTRAL (N) indi-
cator light will blink while the shift is in progress.
The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the
shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. After the shift is
completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
6. Release the parking brake.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is
no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in
DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
10. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply
the parking brake. Turn OFF the engine. For vehicles
with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the EN-
GINE START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.
11. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual
transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL).
12. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and
remove the Key Fob.
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:
• Steps 2 through 5 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before push-
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
• With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer
case lever to the desired position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
• With electronic shift transfer case, push and hold the
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button until the NEU-
TRAL (N) indicator light turns off. After the NEU-
TRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release the NEU-
TRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL (N) button
has been released, the transfer case will shift to the
position indicated by the selector switch.
NOTE: When shifting the transfer case out of NEUTRAL
(N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid gear clash.
6. Shift automatic transmission into PARK.
7. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on a manual
transmission).
8. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
9. Start the engine.
10. Press and hold the brake pedal.
11. Release the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions),
and check that the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:
• Steps 3 through 5 are requirements that must be met
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before push-
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........530
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............530
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................531
▫ Torque Specifications ..................532
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........534
▫ 4500/5500 Models .....................535
▫ Preparations For Jacking.................535
▫ Jacking Instructions ....................536
䡵 HOISTING ...........................542
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........543
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............543
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................545
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............547
䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .549
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .............549
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........550
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models ................552
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models................553
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
upper switch bank just below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Type
**Lug
Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
120-150 Ft-Lbs
(160-200 N·m)
Cone M14 x
1.50
22 mm
130-160 Ft-Lbs
(190-220 N·m)
Flanged
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
NOTE: Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted.
The lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are
being rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add
two drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the
washer.
Two-Piece Lug Nut
532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
Wheel Mounting Surface 8/10 Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Patterns
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4500/5500 Models
These vehicles do not come equipped with a jack.
NOTE: Jacking and tire changing on 4500/5500 models
should be performed by an authorized dealer, or knowl-
edgeable service personnel with the appropriate heavy
duty equipment, like a tire service company.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission). On 4-Wheel
drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the “4L”
position.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535
Jacking Instructions
Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. If equipped, remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools
from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack
drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to
the tire as possible with the drive tubes extending to
the front. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel
wrench.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Securely place the jack under the sway
bar bracket (unless both tires are flat on one side, then
place jack under shock bracket) facing forward in vehicle.
Connect the jack tube extension and lug wrench.
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
NOTE: If the jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the
jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.
Front Jacking Locations Rear Jacking Location
538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nuts toward the wheel on single rear wheel
(SRW) models. On dual rear wheel models (DRW) the
lug nuts are a two-piece assembly with a flat face.
Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the nuts until
the vehicle has been lowered.
6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts
using a crisscross pattern. For the proper lug nut
torque specifications refer to “Wheel and Tire Torque
Specifications” in this section. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-
ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel
in the places provided.
7. Install wheel center cap (if equipped) and remove
wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum
wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may result
in cap damage.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the jack
will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by
hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in
order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack,
and tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
off the ground.
CAUTION!
Use extreme caution when removing the front and
rear center caps. Damage can occur to the center cap
and/or the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used. A
pulling motion, not a pry off motion, is recom-
mended to remove the caps.
For single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the flat blade on
the end of the lug wrench to pull the hub cap off. Insert
the blade end into the pull off notch and carefully pull the
hub cap off with a back and forth motion.
On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must
first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a
hook at one end that will fit in the pull off notch of the
rear hub caps. Position the hook and pull straight out on
the ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel
skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap, use the
flat blade on the end of the lug wrench to pull the caps
off. The wheel skin can now be removed.
CAUTION!
• Use a pulling motion to remove the hub cap. Do not
use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap,
damage to the hub cap; finish may occur.
(Continued)
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two
pull off notches. Make sure that the hook of the
jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap
notch before attempting to pull off.
You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pull off the
wheel skins. Locate the hub cap pull notches (2 notches
on each cap). Insert the flat tip completely and using a
back and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug
nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a
rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins
are firmly seated around the wheel.
Dual Rear Wheels
Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the
inner and outer wheels. Align these slots when assem-
bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the
inner wheel. The tires of both dual wheels must be
completely off the ground when tightening to insure
wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping.
Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty lug nut
tightening adapter (included with the vehicle) to cor-
rectly tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is necessary to
remove and install dual rear wheels, use a proper vehicle
lifting device.
NOTE: When installing a spare tire (if equipped) as part
of a dual rear wheel end combination, the tire diameter of
the two individual tires must be compared. If there is a
significant difference, the larger tire should be installed in
a front location. The correct direction of rotation for dual
tire installations must also be observed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued
to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
• Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the
torques listed in the table. Go through the sequence a
second time to verify that specific torque has been
achieved. Retighten to specifications at 100 miles
(160 km) and after 500 miles (800 km).
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi-
nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the
bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles/
kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to
become properly set. All wheel nuts should first be firmly
seated against the wheel. The wheel nuts should then be
tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the wheel
nuts to final torque in increments. Progress around the
bolt circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel
nut just previously tightened until final torque is
achieved.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare — If Equipped
Refer to Upfitters Body Builders Guide for information
on stowing your spare tire (if equipped).
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking
locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking loca-
tions. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be
used on any other parts of the underbody.
CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result.
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump
directly off positive post.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Correct Positive Jumping Location
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses on
the positive battery terminal. The resulting electrical
current will blow the fuse.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Next, shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear
and REVERSE (with manual transmission) while gently
pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accel-
erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the en-
gine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547
CAUTION! (Continued)
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-
ing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a
vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the gear selec-
tor:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port
(ringed circle) on the bottom of the steering column,
and push and hold the override release lever up.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the trans-
mission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
Gear Selector Override Access Port
550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing
Condition
Wheels
OFF the
Ground
2WD Models 4WD Models
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
See instructions in “Recreational Tow-
ing” under “Starting and Operating”
• Auto Transmission in PARK
• Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT
NEUTRAL)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift
or Dolly
Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the Key Fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this
section for instructions on shifting the automatic trans-
mission out of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with the rear
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a
towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel
stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
with rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not cov-
ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF
the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmis-
sion is in PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear
(NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information and detailed instructions.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper tow-
ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L ..........557
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .558
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ........................558
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............559
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................560
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................561
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................561
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........562
▫ Engine Oil ..........................563
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................565
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................565
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...........568
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............570
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............571
▫ Front Prop Shaft Lubrication — Four-Wheel
Drive Models ........................573
▫ Body Lubrication .....................574
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............574
7
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................578
▫ Exhaust System ......................578
▫ Cooling System ......................580
▫ Brake System ........................586
▫ Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle
Fluid Level .........................588
▫ Transfer Case ........................590
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....590
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................594
䡵 FUSES ..............................601
▫ Power Distribution Center ...............602
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................612
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................612
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................613
▫ Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam
Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park
And Turn — If Equipped ...............614
▫ Fog Lamps — If Equipped ..............616
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp .........................616
▫ Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped . . . .618
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................620
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................621
▫ Engine .............................621
▫ Chassis ............................623
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
1 — Coolant Pressure Bottle 6 — Battery
2 — Transmission Dipstick 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Solvent
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Air Cleaner Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect
CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC/DID telltale display
area. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the
SELECT button to turn off the message. If the problem
continues, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately
have potential malfunctions examined by an autho-
rized dealer or qualified repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
(Continued)
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
Engine Oil Selection — 6.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petro-
leum Institute (API). The manufac-
turer only recommends API Certified
engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 6.4L Engine
Use MOPAR SAE 0W-40 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-12633 such as Pennzoil Ultra
equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-
tures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high-
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high-quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte-
nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance
intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if
you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should
change your air cleaner filter.
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover.
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Spring Clips
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to
the housing assembly.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
(Continued)
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition switch position. You could be injured by
the moving fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser-
viced at an authorized dealer.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
(Continued)
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air condition-
ing system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf — If
Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoole-
fine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protec-
tion Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low
GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manu-
facturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Front Prop Shaft Lubrication — Four-Wheel Drive
Models
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil
change. The grease fitting is located at the rear of the
front driveshaft, near the centering mechanism of double
cardan joint. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. Use MOPAR Type MS-
6560 (lithium-based grease), or equivalent.
Front Drive Shaft Double Cardan Joint
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the fol-
lowing points:
• Wear Or Uneven Edges
• Foreign Material
• Hardening Or Cracking
• Deformation Or Fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against
the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
press the release tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1—WiperBlade
2—WiperArm
3 — Release Tab
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator anti-
freeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for
a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield
washer solution used with water as directed on the
container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the
radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
The radiator drain cock is located in the lower radiator
tank. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant
(antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant expan-
sion bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRES-
SURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain Flush And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
dealer for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or chil-
dren, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine
The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle
should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” range on the
bottle when the engine is cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the cap unless checking for coolant
freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze).
Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month. When addi-
tional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service or immediately
if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” dot and an “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
WARNING! (Continued)
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
For models with 9.25 in Front Axles and 11.5 in Rear
Axles, refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons,
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected.
When checking the fluid level (4500/5500 only), the
vehicle should be in a level position. The fluid level
should be ¼ in±¼in(6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill
hole on the front axle. The fluid level should be level with
the bottom of the fill hole on the rear axle.
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Drain And Refill
On 4500/5500 vehicles, remove the lower bolt to drain
the axle fluid.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials DO NOT REQUIRE any
limited slip oil additive (friction modifiers).
NOTE: Slight noise and mild shuddering may be evident
while turning a vehicle with limited slip differential on
concrete or dry pavement. These conditions should be
considered normal operation of the limited slip differen-
tial.
4500/5500 Rear Axle Plugs
1 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Fill Plug
2 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Drain Plug
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
Transfer Case
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler
plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the
filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-
tions.
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level when the engine is fully warmed up
and the transmission fluid is at normal operating tem-
perature. Driving with an improper fluid level will
greatly reduce the life of the transmission and of the
fluid. Check the fluid level whenever the vehicle is
serviced.
Fluid Level Check — Procedure
It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is
at normal operating temperature (170-180°F / 77-82°C for
66RFE transmission, or 158–176°F / 70–80°C for AS66RC
transmission). This normally occurs after at least 15 miles
(25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the
fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
You can read the transmission sump temperature in the
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
EVIC/DID display (refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation).
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
fluid level properly:
1. Monitor the transmission temperature using the
EVIC/DID display, and operate the vehicle as re-
quired to reach the normal operating temperature. If
the transmission is not functioning properly, or the
vehicle cannot be driven, see the NOTE and CAU-
TION below about checking the fluid level at colder
temperatures.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of
this procedure.
4. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear
position (allowing time for the transmission to fully
engage in each position), ending with the transmission
in PARK.
6. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent dirt
from entering the transmission.
7. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
8. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid
if the actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level
should be between the “HOT” (upper) reference holes
on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube
to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. Use
ONLY the specified fluid (see ⬙Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts⬙ for fluid specifications). After adding
any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait a
minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into
the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C for 66RFE transmis-
sion, or 68-86°F / 20-30°C for AS66RC transmission. Only
use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough reference
when setting the fluid level after a transmission service
or fluid change. Re-check the fluid level, and adjust as
required, once the transmission reaches normal operating
temperature.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it may
not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until
the temperature is elevated enough to produce an
accurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to
warm the fluid.
9. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks. Release the
parking brake.
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is
normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from
its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains
engaged in the dipstick tube.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
Fluid And Filter Changes — Six Speed
Transmission
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter(s) if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
mission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
age than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
Power Distribution Center Location
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 80 Amp Black – Rad Fan Control Module – If Equipped
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan – If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension – If
Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Con-
trol Pump
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08 20 Amp Blue
(1500 LD/Cummins
Diesel)
– Emissions Diesel – If Equipped
F09 40 Amp Green
(Special Services
Vehicle & Cummins
Diesel)
– Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F10 50 Amp Red – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2 – If
Equipped with Stop/Start
F11 30 Amp Pink – Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If
Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3 / Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4 / Interior Lighting
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart Bar – If Equipped
F19 20 Amp Blue (1500
LD Diesel)
30 Amp Pink
(Cummins Diesel)
– SCR – If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F21 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F22 20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
(Cummins Diesel)
– Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink – Body Controller #1 / Interior Lighting
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F26 30 Amp Pink – Antilock Brakes / Stability Control Mod-
ule / Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle
F31 30 Amp Pink (1500
LD Diesel)
– Urea Heater Control – If Equipped
F32 – – Spare Fuse
F33 20 Amp Blue – Special Services Vehicle Only
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F34 30 Amp Pink – Vehicle System Interface Module #2 – If
Equipped
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof – If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster – If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – Cummins Diesel Fuel Heater #2 – If
Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115V AC – If Equipped
F39 20 Amp Blue – Power Outlet – Special Services Only
F41 – 10 Amp Red Active Grill Shutter – If Equipped
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitter – If Equipped
F49 – 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster (except for fleet
vehicles)
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module – If
Equipped
F51 – 10 Amp Red Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition
(Instrument Panel Cluster – Fleet Vehicles
Only)
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Diesel Content – If Equipped
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Transmission
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare Fuse
F59 – 10 Amp Red SCR Relay – If Equipped
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Underhood Lamp
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F61 – 10 Amp Red (1500
LD Diesel & Cum-
mins Diesel)
PM Sensor – If Equipped
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Cum-
mins Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
F65 – – Spare Fuse
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches /
Rain Sensor
F67 – 10 Amp Red CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Mod-
ule – If Equipped
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Mod SCR 12V (Cummins Diesel) – If
Equipped
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F72 – 10 Amp Red PCM – If Equipped
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump (HD Only) – If
Equipped
F74 – 20 Amp Yellow
(Gas Engine & 1500
LD Diesel)
Brake Vacuum Pump Gas/Diesel – If
Equipped
F75 – 10 Amp Red Coolant Temperature Valve Actuator
F76 – 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes / Electronic Stability Con-
trol
F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle
Disconnect Module
F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module / Electric Power
Steering
F79 – 15 Amp Blue Clearance Lights
F80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module / Cruise
Control
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank / Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension – If Equipped / Trailer
Tow / Steering Column Control Module
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (rear seats) Customer Select-
able
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter / Transfer Case Module
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Park Assist
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F97 – 25 Amp Clear Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering
Wheel – If Equipped
F98 – 25 Amp Clear Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters – If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart High
Beams – If Equipped
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel / Center
Console)
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
CAUTION! (Continued)
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to mini-
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
•
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Overhead Console
Lamps
TS 212-2
Dome Lamp 7679
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior
Bulb Number
Quad Headlamp – Low
Beam
H11
Quad Headlamp – High
Beam
9005
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Bulb Number
Quad Headlamp – Front
Turn Signal Lamp
3157NA
Premium Headlamp –
Low Beam
HIR2
Premium Headlamp –
High Beam
9005
Premium Headlamp –
Front Turn Signal Lamp
LED (See authorized
dealer for service)
Horizontal Fog Lamp 9145
Vertical Fog Lamp 9006
Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp
921
Rear Cargo Lamp 921
Bulb Number
Box Off Tail Lamps –
Stop/Turn/Tail/License
Plate
1157
Box Off Tail Lamps –
Back Up
1156
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam
Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park And
Turn — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the six plastic push-in fasteners that secure
the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both
fender ledges.
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the
upper radiator seal to the radiator.
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle.
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment
screws.
7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the
access hole in the front of the wheel house splash
shield. Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained
through this access hole.
Headlamp Assembly Attachment Screw Locations
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house
splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough
to disengage it from the lock post on the back of the
front lamp unit housing.
9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard
edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to
disengage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.
10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the
bulb socket.
11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.
CAUTION!
•
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb
socket, or the lamp wiring.
Slide Lock
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp bulb
access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if
equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the
bulb has been replaced.
Fog Lamps — If Equipped
1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access
the back of the front fog lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector
from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise ¼ turn to unlock the
bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to
the body as shown.
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wir-
ing harness to the body.
3. Turn the desired bulb socket ¼ turn and remove the
socket and bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations CHMSL Connector Location
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
• Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.
CHMSL Bulb And Socket
Removing Rear Screw From Clearance Lamp
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate the bulb socket ¼ turn and pull it from the lamp
assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace.
Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp
Removing The Bulb From The Bulb Socket
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Standard Rear Tank 52 Gallons 197 Liters
Optional Midship Tank 22 Gallons 83 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API
Certified)
7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
6.4L Engine (We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula).
16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10–Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
Engine Oil – 6.4L Engine For best performance and maximum protection under
all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer
only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet
the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of
SN. The manufacturer recommends the use of Penn-
zoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent MOPAR engine oil
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter – 6.4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs – 6.4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Fuel Selection – 6.4L Engine 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable,
0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission (6.4L Engine
with 66RFE Transmission) (For Diesel
Engine See Diesel Supplement)
Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4
fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We
recommend MOPAR ATF+4 fluid.
Automatic Transmission (6.4L Engine
with AS66RC Transmission)
Use only MOPAR ASRC Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the proper fluid may affect the function or performance
of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR BW44-44 Transfer Case Fluid.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid (4500/5500) We recommend you use GL-5 SAE 75W-90 Synthetic (MS-9763).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR
ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Gasoline Engines:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty:
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty
626 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and automatic trans-
mission and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
•
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
• Lube the front drive shaft fitting.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 627
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle
surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level.
If using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent
trailer towing, change axle fluid.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
XXX X X X X
628 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
XX
Change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid (AS66RC Transmission
Only).
XX X
Change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid and sump filter
(AS66RC Transmission Only).
XX
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 629
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid and filter(s) (66RFE
Transmission Only), if using your
vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.
XX
Change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid and filter(s) (66RFE
transmission).
X
Inspect the transfer case fluid,
change for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
XX X X X
Change the transfer case fluid. X
630 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 631
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................635
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............635
▫ Prepare A List ........................635
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............635
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............635
▫ FCA USA LLC Customer Center ...........636
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........636
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................637
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........637
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................637
▫ Service Contract ......................638
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............639
䡵 MOPARPARTS ........................639
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............639
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................639
▫ In Canada ...........................640
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............640
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 635
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA USA LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
636 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 637
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
(Continued)
638 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 639
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
640 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 641
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
642 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 643
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............582
Adding Fuel .............................498
Additives, Fuel ...........................496
Adjust
Down ............................140, 141
Forward ..........................140, 141
Rearward .........................140, 141
Up ..............................140, 141
Adjustable Pedals .........................175
AirBag.................................67
Advance Front Air Bag ....................69
Air Bag Operation .......................70
Air Bag Warning Light ....................78
Enhanced Accident Response ................77
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................80
FrontAirBag...........................67
If A Deployment Occurs ...................76
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................71
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............79
Side Air Bags ...........................71
Transporting Pets .......................112
Air Bag Deployment ........................67
Air Bag Light ......................78, 116, 237
Air Bag Maintenance .......................79
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .565
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................571
Air Conditioning ......................347, 352
Air Conditioning Controls................347, 352
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips...........366, 368
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..........571, 572, 573
Air Conditioning System ..........347, 352, 365, 571
Air Pressure, Tires .....................468, 479
Alarm, Panic .............................28
Alarm (Security Alarm) ..................21, 240
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................21
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..................582
Capacities ............................620
646 INDEX
Disposal ..............................584
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................438
Appearance Care .........................594
Ashtray ................................211
Assist, Hill Start ..........................441
Auto Down Power Windows ..................46
Automatic Door Locks ......................38
Automatic Headlights ......................160
Automatic High Beams .....................162
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........365
Automatic Transmission ....................590
Adding Fluid ..........................592
Fluid And Filter Changes ..................594
Fluid Level Check .......................591
Fluid Type .........................590, 623
Shifting ..............................404
Special Additives .......................591
Axle Fluid........................588, 589, 623
Axle Lubrication ......................588, 589
Back-Up Camera..........................201
Battery .............................242, 570
Charging System Light ...................242
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........29
Belts, Seat...............................115
Body Builders Guide ........................6
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................574
B-Pillar Location ..........................462
Brake Assist System .......................441
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............437
Brake Fluid ..........................587, 623
Brake System .........................437, 586
Fluid Check ...........................587
Master Cylinder ........................587
Parking ..............................434
Warning Light .........................238
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................404
10
INDEX 647
Bulb Replacement .........................613
Bulbs, Light ..........................117,612
Cab Top Clearance Lights ...................618
Camera, Rear ............................201
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........620
Capacities, Fluid ..........................620
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ...........................564
Power Steering .........................434
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................584
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............114,498
Cargo Light .............................168
Car Washes .............................595
Center High Mounted Stop Light ..............616
Center Seat Storage Compartment .............218
Certification Label.........................500
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................456
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .560
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............114
Checks, Safety............................114
Child Restraint ............................81
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................86
Child Restraints .........................81
Child Seat Installation .................100, 102
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt ........98
Infants And Child Restraints ................84
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint ....97
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt ..................................99
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ............94
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......89
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........85
Seating Positions ........................88
Cigar Lighter ............................211
Clean Air Gasoline ........................494
648 INDEX
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................596
Climate Control .......................347, 357
Automatic ............................357
Cold Weather Operation ....................399
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............344
Compact Spare Tire ........................474
Console, Overhead ........................204
Contract, Service ..........................638
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........584
Cooling System...........................580
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............582
Coolant Capacity .......................620
Coolant Level ......................581, 585
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................584
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................581
Inspection ............................585
Points To Remember .....................585
Pressure Cap ..........................584
Radiator Cap ..........................584
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .........582, 621
Corrosion Protection .......................594
Cruise Light..........................263, 264
Cupholders .............................213
Customer Assistance .......................635
Customer Programmable Features .............325
Data Recorder, Event .......................80
Daytime Running Lights ....................161
Dealer Service............................561
Defroster, Rear Window.....................223
Defroster, Windshield ...................116,350
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..................171
Differential, Limited-Slip ....................429
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ..................591
Power Steering .........................434
Disabled
Vehicle Towing ....................550
10
INDEX 649
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................584
Door Ajar...............................246
Door Ajar Light ..........................246
Door Locks
Door Locks ............................36
KeyFob...............................36
Remote ...............................36
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................36
Door Locks, Automatic ......................38
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ................................431
Dual Rear Wheels ..................483, 532, 541
Electrical Power Outlets.....................206
Electric Rear Window Defrost.................223
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case.............423
Electronic Brake Control System ...............437
Anti-Lock Brake System ..................438
Electronic Roll Mitigation .................449
Traction Control System ...................444
Electronic Range Select (ERS) .................412
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........178
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............445
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........244
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . .201, 265
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .265
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup
Menu ................................265
EVIC Messages .........................265
Selectable Menu Items ....................273
Emergency Brake .........................434
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................547
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................530
Jump Starting ..........................543
Tow Hooks ............................549
650 INDEX
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........560
Engine .................................557
Air Cleaner ...........................565
Break-In Recommendations .............112,113
Compartment Identification ................557
Coolant (Antifreeze) .....................621
Exhaust Gas Caution .................114,498
Flooded, Starting .......................399
Fuel Requirements ......................494
Jump Starting ..........................543
Oil ..............................563, 621
Oil Filler Cap ..........................564
Oil Filter .............................565
Oil Selection ...........................564
Oil Synthetic ..........................565
Overheating ...........................530
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................564
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............77
Entry System, Illuminated ....................24
Ethanol ................................495
Event Data Recorder ........................80
Exhaust Gas Caution....................114,498
Exhaust System .......................114,578
Exterior Lighting..........................159
Exterior Lights ...........................117
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................565
Engine Fuel ...........................621
Engine Oil .........................565, 621
Engine Oil Disposal .....................565
Flashers
Turn Signal .....................117,169, 262
Flat Tire Stowage .........................542
Flooded Engine Starting ....................399
Fluid, Brake .............................623
Fluid Capacities ..........................620
Fluid Leaks .............................118
10
INDEX 651
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ..................591
Brake ................................587
Power Steering .........................434
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........621
Fog Lights........................164, 256, 616
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...................530
Four Wheel Drive .........................419
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................547
Front Axle (Differential).....................588
Fuel...................................494
Adding ..............................498
Additives .............................496
Clean Air .............................494
Ethanol ..............................495
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................499
Filter ................................621
Gasoline ..............................494
Light ................................253
Materials Added ........................496
Methanol .............................495
Octane Rating ..........................494
Requirements ..........................494
Tank Capacity ..........................620
Fuses ..................................601
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ................499, 559
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................494
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................494
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................494
Gear Ranges .............................405
Gear Select Lever Override ..................549
Glass Cleaning ...........................600
Grocery Bag Retainer.......................222
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...................503
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..................502
Guide,
Body Builders ........................6
652 INDEX
GVWR .................................500
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .........................431
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................530
Headlights ..............................614
Automatic ............................160
Cleaning .............................600
High Beam ............................170
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........170
Passing ..............................170
Switch ...............................159
Head Restraints ..........................148
Heated Mirrors .......................136, 223
Heater..............................347, 352
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .170
Hill Descent Control .......................451
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................451
Hill Start Assist...........................441
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................507
Hoisting................................542
Hood Release ............................156
Hub Caps...............................540
Ignition .................................16
Key ...............................12, 16
Ignition Key Removal .......................16
Illuminated Entry ..........................24
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................19
Inflation Pressure Tires .....................479
Information Center, Vehicle ...............265, 284
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................124, 132
Instrument Cluster ...........229, 232, 241, 246, 262
Instrument Panel And Controls ...............228
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............600
Integrated Trailer Brake Controls ..............512
10
INDEX 653
Interior Appearance Care....................598
Interior Lights ...........................165
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............171
Introduction ..............................4
Inverter Outlet (115V) ......................212
Jack Location ............................534
Jump Starting ............................543
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........21
Programming Additional Transmitters .........21
Key-In Reminder ..........................18
Keyless Enter-N-Go ........................41
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ..............317, 334
Passive Entry ...........................41
Passive Entry Programming ..........41, 317, 334
Keyless Entry System .......................25
Key, Replacement ..........................20
Keys ...................................12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................19
Lane Change And Turn Signals ...............169
Lane Change Assist........................170
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................53
Latches ................................117
Lead Free Gasoline ........................494
Leaks, Fluid .............................118
Life Of Tires .............................477
Light Bulbs..............................117
Lights ..............................117,158
AirBag ........................78, 116, 237
Automatic Headlights ....................160
Brake Assist Warning ....................448
Brake Warning .........................238
Bulb Replacement ....................612, 613
Cap Top Clearance ......................618
Cargo ...............................168
654 INDEX
Center Mounted Stop ....................616
Courtesy/Reading ................166, 168, 204
Cruise ............................263, 264
Daytime Running .......................161
Engine Temperature Warning ...............241
Exterior ..............................117
Fog ..........................164, 256, 616
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator ................423
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................530
Headlights ............................159
High Beam ............................170
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............170
Hill Descent Control Indicator ..............451
Illuminated Entry ........................24
Interior ....................165, 166, 168, 204
Low Fuel .............................253
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........247
Park ................................261
Passing ..............................170
Seat Belt Reminder ......................236
Security Alarm .........................240
Service ...........................612, 613
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .........251, 484
Traction Control ........................448
Transfer Case ..........................423
Turn Signal ..................117,169, 262, 614
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .241, 262
Limited-Slip Differential .................429, 589
Loading Vehicle ..........................500
Tires ................................462
Locks ..................................36
Automatic Door .........................38
Child Protection .........................39
Door .................................36
Power Door ............................38
Low Tire Pressure System ...................484
Lubrication, Body .........................574
10
INDEX 655
Lug Nuts .....................531, 532, 539, 541
Maintenance Free Battery....................570
Maintenance Procedures ....................562
Maintenance Schedule ......................626
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .247, 560
Manual, Service ..........................640
Manual Transmission
Fluid Level Check .......................590
Memory Seat ............................152
Methanol ...............................495
Mirrors ................................124
Electric Powered ........................134
Heated ...............................136
Memory ..............................152
Outside ..............................132
Rearview ..........................124, 132
Trailer Towing .........................137
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................484
MOPAR Parts.........................561, 639
MTBE/ETBE ............................495
Multi-Function Control Lever .................169
Navigation System (Uconnect GPS).............201
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..............112,113
Occupant Restraints ........................49
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................494
Oil, Engine ..........................563, 621
Capacity .............................620
Change Interval ........................563
Dipstick ..............................563
Disposal ..............................565
Filter .............................565, 621
Filter Disposal .........................565
Identification Logo ......................564
Pressure Warning Light ...................243
656 INDEX
Recommendation .......................564
Synthetic .............................565
Viscosity .............................564
Oil Filter, Change .........................565
Oil Pressure Light .........................243
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................558
Operating Precautions ......................558
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................132
Overdrive...............................413
Overdrive OFF Switch ......................413
Overhead Console.........................204
Overheating, Engine .......................530
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,640
Paint Care ..............................594
Panic Alarm ..............................28
Parking Brake............................434
ParkSense System, Rear..................183, 192
Passing Light ............................170
Passive Entry .............................41
Pedals, Adjustable.........................175
Personalized Menu Bar .....................369
Personal Settings ......................278, 301
Pets ...................................112
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........463
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) ................602
Door Locks ............................38
Mirrors ..............................134
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........206, 212
Seats ................................139
Sliding Rear Window ....................224
Steering ...........................433, 434
Take-Off Adapter .......................416
Take-Off Operation ......................416
Windows ..............................45
10
INDEX 657
Power Seats
Down ............................140, 141
Forward ..........................140, 141
Rearward .........................140, 141
Recline ...............................140
Tilt .................................141
Up ..............................140, 141
Power Steering Fluid.......................623
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............63
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................63
Programmable Electronic Features ..........278, 301
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25
PTO (Power Take-Off) ......................416
Radial Ply Tires ..........................471
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ........581, 584
Radio Frequency
General Information ............18, 21, 32, 35, 45
Radio Operation ..........................345
Radio (Sound Systems) .....................341
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .................173
Rear Axle (Differential) ..................588, 589
Rear ParkSense System ..................183, 192
Rear Window Features .....................223
Rear Window, Sliding ......................224
Reclining Rear Seats .......................147
Recorder, Event Data .......................80
Recreational Towing .......................522
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ........525
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ......527
Reformulated Gasoline .....................494
Refrigerant...........................572, 573
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................51
Remote Control
Starting System .........................32
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)................25, 26
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........21
658 INDEX
Programming Additional Transmitters .........21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........343
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .319, 336
Uconnect Settings ....................319, 336
Remote Starting System......................32
Replacement Keys .........................20
Replacement Parts.........................561
Replacement Tires .........................477
Reporting Safety Defects ....................639
Restraint, Head...........................148
Restraints, Child...........................81
Restraints, Occupant ........................49
Rotation, Tires ...........................481
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle..................115
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................117
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................639
Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................114
Safety Information, Tire .....................454
Safety Tips ..............................114
Schedule, Maintenance .....................626
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......58
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........64
Energy Management Feature ................64
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................55
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................53
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............57
Pregnant Women ........................63
Seat Belt Extender .......................62
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................63
Seat Belt Reminder .......................51
Seat Belt System .........................49
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................601
Seat Belt Reminder .........................51
Seat Belts.............................51, 115
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................58
10
INDEX 659
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........58
Child Restraint ..........................81
Extender ..............................62
Front Seat ........................51, 53, 55
Inspection ............................115
Operating Instructions ....................55
Pregnant Women ........................63
Pretensioners ...........................63
Rear Seat ..............................53
Reminder .............................236
Untwisting Procedure .....................57
Seats ........................138, 140, 141, 147
Adjustment .....................138, 140, 141
Easy Entry ............................155
Memory ..............................152
Power ...............................139
Reclining Rear .........................147
Security Alarm.........................21, 240
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............621
SENTRY KEY
Key Programming .......................21
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................19
Sentry Key Replacement .....................20
Service Assistance .........................635
Service Contract ..........................638
Service Manuals ..........................640
Settings, Personal ......................278, 301
Shifting ................................401
Automatic Transmission ..................404
Transfer Case ..........................422
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral
(N) .................................525
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ...........................527
Shift Lever Override .......................549
Shoulder Belts ............................53
Signals, Turn ......................117,169, 262
660 INDEX
Sliding Rear Window
Power ...............................224
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................479
Snow Plow..............................519
Snow Tires ..............................472
Spare Tire ........................473, 474, 475
Spark Plugs .............................621
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ...........................182
Cancel ...............................180
Resume ..............................180
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................178
Starting..............................32, 398
Automatic Transmission ..................399
Cold Weather ..........................399
Engine Fails To Start .....................399
Remote ...............................32
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) .............398
Steering
Power ............................433, 434
Wheel, Heated .........................177
Wheel, Tilt ............................174
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............343
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .343
Storage Compartment, Center Seat .............218
Storage, Vehicle .......................367, 612
Storing Your Vehicle .......................612
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........67
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information .........479
Sway Control, Trailer.......................450
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................565
System, Remote Starting .....................32
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........365
Tilt
Down ...............................141
Up .................................141
10
INDEX 661
Tilt Steering Column .......................174
Tip Start................................399
Tire And Loading Information Placard. . . .462, 463, 479
Tire Markings ............................454
Tires.....................117,467, 473, 474, 641
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................477
Air Pressure ...........................467
Chains ...............................479
Compact Spare .........................474
Dual ..........................483, 532, 541
General Information ...............467, 473, 474
High Speed ...........................470
Inflation Pressures .......................468
Life Of Tires ...........................477
Load Capacity ......................462, 463
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............484
Pressure Warning Light ...................251
Quality Grading ........................641
Radial ...............................471
Replacement ...........................477
Rotation ..............................481
Safety ............................454, 467
Sizes ................................456
Snow Tires ............................472
Spare Tire ......................473, 474, 475
Spinning .............................476
Tread Wear Indicators ....................476
Wheel Nut Torque ......................539
Tire Safety Information .....................454
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................508
Torque Converter Clutch ....................415
Tow Hooks, Emergency .....................549
Towing .............................502, 550
Disabled Vehicle ........................550
Guide ...............................508
Recr
eational ...........................522
Weight ...............................508
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........522
662 INDEX
Traction ................................430
Traction Control ..........................444
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..................450
Trailer Towing ...........................502
Cooling System Tips .....................518
Hitches ..............................507
Minimum Requirements ..................508
Mirrors ..............................137
Trailer And Tongue Weight ................508
Wiring ...............................517
Trailer Towing Guide.......................508
Trailer Weight............................508
Transfer Case ............................590
Electronically Shifted .....................423
Fluid ................................623
Transmission ............................590
Automatic .........................404, 590
Fluid ................................623
Shifting ..............................401
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .29
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .25
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........25
Transporting Pets .........................112
Tread Wear Indicators ......................476
Turn Signals ......................169, 262, 614
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features ........319, 336
Operation .............................341
Uconnect Settings .......................308
Uconnect Settings ....................319, 336
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information ...................391
Do Not Disturb ........................390
Siri Eyes Free ..........................389
Uconnect 8.4 Settings
Customer Programmable Features — Units .....328
10
INDEX 663
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert .....................384
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ......41, 317, 334
Passive Entry Programming ..........41, 317, 334
Uconnect Settings ....................317, 334
Uconnect Voice Command ...................370
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................641
Unleaded Gasoline ........................494
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................57
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............7
Vehicle Loading .......................463, 500
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............8
Vehicle Storage........................367, 612
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................564
Voice Recognition System (VR)................370
Warnings And Cautions ......................6
Warranty Information ......................639
Washers, Windshield....................171, 578
Washing Vehicle ..........................595
Water
Driving Through ........................431
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................596
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................596
Wheel Cover ............................540
Wheel Nut Torque .....................539, 542
Wind Buffeting............................49
Window Fogging .........................367
Windows ................................45
Power ................................45
Rear Sliding ...........................224
Reset Auto-Up ..........................48
Wind Buffeting ..........................49
Windshield Defroster.......................116
Windshield Washers.................170, 171, 578
Fluid .............................170, 578
664 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
Chassis Cab
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 Chassis Cab
SIXTH Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
16DD43-126-AF
